Lexmark Printer Users Manual Technical Reference
Technical Reference techref_3Q04 La Biblioteca de los 8 bits
Printer to the manual 23c8bb9b-cb3e-436e-9251-e79f5111b8e2
2015-01-23
: Lexmark Lexmark-Printer-Users-Manual-269139 lexmark-printer-users-manual-269139 lexmark pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 455
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Technical Reference August 2004 Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries. © 2004 Lexmark International, Inc. 740 West New Circle Road Lexington, Kentucky 40550 www.lexmark.com Edition: August 2004 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time. Comments about this publication may be addressed to Lexmark International, Inc., Department F95/032-2, 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, Kentucky 40550, U.S.A. In the United Kingdom and Eire, send to Lexmark International Ltd., Marketing and Services Department, Westhorpe House, Westhorpe, Marlow Bucks SL7 3RQ. Lexmark may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. You can purchase additional copies of publications related to this product by calling 1-800-553-9727. In the United Kingdom and Eire, call +44 (0)8704 440 044. In other countries, contact your point of purchase. References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility. Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, MarkVision, and Optra are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries. ColorGrade, PerfectFinish, and PictureGrade are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc. The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies: Albertus Antique Olive Apple-Chancery Arial Candid CG Omega CG Times The Monotype Corporation plc Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Computer, Inc. The Monotype Corporation plc Agfa Corporation Product of Agfa Corporation Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer, Inc. Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer, Inc. GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Mona Lisa ITC Zapf Chancery Joanna MT Marigold Monaco New York Oxford Palatino Stempel Garamond Taffy Times New Roman TrueType Univers Wingdings International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation International Typeface Corporation The Monotype Corporation plc Arthur Baker Apple Computer, Inc. Apple Computer, Inc. Arthur Baker Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Agfa Corporation The Monotype Corporation plc Apple Computer, Inc. Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries Microsoft Corporation AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 are Hewlett-Packard Company’s designations of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. These printers are intended to be compatible with the PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 languages. This means these printers recognize PCL 3, PCL 5, and PCL 6 commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands. PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript is Adobe Systems’ designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its software products. These printers are intended to be compatible with the PostScript language. This means these printers recognize PostScript commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Safety Information • If your product is not marked with this symbol , it must be connected to an electrical outlet that is properly grounded. CAUTION: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the power cord or telephone, during a lightning storm. • The power cord must be connected to an electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible. • Refer to the Setup Guide for additional safety information, and for setting up the equipment. • Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the operating instructions, to a professional service person. © 1998, 2004 Lexmark International, Inc. All rights reserved. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense. TOC-1 Contents Contents Introduction ......................................................................1-1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1-1 Navigational Tips ................................................................................................ 1-4 Printing the File................................................................................................... 1-4 Bibliography........................................................................................................ 1-5 PCL Emulation..................................................................2-1 Selecting PCL Emulation....................................................................................2-1 Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................ 2-1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional.................................. 2-1 Using Your Software Program ......................................................................2-2 Page Formatting ................................................................................................. 2-3 Printable Areas.............................................................................................. 2-3 Lexmark C510(n) .......................................................................................... 2-4 Lexmark X422 ............................................................................................... 2-5 Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n ...............................................2-6 Print Area Menu Item.......................................................................................... 2-7 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422 ......................................... 2-9 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark X422 .......... 2-10 Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark X422.............................................2-15 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n) .................................. 2-19 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C510(n)...... 2-20 Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C510(n) ........................................2-25 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E230, E232............................. 2-29 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E230, E232 2-30 Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E230, E232 ........................................2-32 Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, E332n............2-37 Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n.......................................................................................................... 2-38 Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n........... 2-43 Command Structure ......................................................................................... 2-59 Control Codes ............................................................................................. 2-59 Commands.................................................................................................. 2-59 TOC-2 Contents PCL Emulation Commands .............................................................................. 2-62 PCL Emulation Commands by Function ..................................................... 2-62 GL/2 Commands .............................................................................................. 2-84 Raster Image Graphics..................................................................................... 2-88 Raster Compression Mode .........................................................................2-88 Macros..............................................................................................................2-95 Printer Job Language ......................................................3-1 PJL Command Notation ..................................................................................... 3-1 Kernel Commands.............................................................................................. 3-2 Job Separation Commands ................................................................................ 3-4 Environment Commands and Variables .............................................................3-7 Status Readback Commands........................................................................... 3-54 Status Message Format ................................................................................... 3-61 Information Messages................................................................................. 3-61 Auto-Continuable Conditions ...................................................................... 3-63 Attendance Conditions ................................................................................ 3-67 Operator Intervention - Paper Handling ......................................................3-72 Operator Intervention - Paper Jams............................................................ 3-75 Service Errors ............................................................................................. 3-80 Device Attendance Commands ........................................................................ 3-80 Unique PJL Commands.................................................................................... 3-82 File Commands for Flash or Disk................................................................ 3-86 File and Device Protection Commands ............................................................ 3-93 Protecting a File or Device .......................................................................... 3-93 Unlocking a Protected File or Device .......................................................... 3-95 Re-Locking a Protected File or Device........................................................ 3-96 Unlocking a Protected File or Device for the Current Job ........................... 3-97 Recovering Lost Passwords........................................................................ 3-98 PostScript Emulation .......................................................4-1 Selecting PostScript Emulation .......................................................................... 4-1 Using SmartSwitch........................................................................................ 4-1 Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional.................................. 4-1 Using Your Software Program ......................................................................4-2 Page Formatting ................................................................................................. 4-3 TOC-3 Contents Printable Areas.............................................................................................. 4-3 Logical Page Size .........................................................................................4-4 PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark X422............................................. 4-7 PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark C510(n) ........................................ 4-9 PostScript Emulation Fonts for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, E332n................ 4-12 Supplemental Operators................................................................................... 4-14 Command Format .......................................................................................4-14 Paper Size Support ..................................................................................... 4-15 Paper Tray Support..................................................................................... 4-18 Envelope Size Support................................................................................ 4-23 Envelope Tray Support ............................................................................... 4-25 Supplemental Operator Summary............................................................... 4-27 Page Device Parameters..................................................................................4-62 Interpreter Parameters ..................................................................................... 4-76 User Parameters ......................................................................................... 4-76 System Parameters..................................................................................... 4-79 Device Parameters...................................................................................... 4-85 Status and Error Messages ............................................................................ 4-106 Tagged Binary Not Active ......................................................................... 4-106 Tagged Binary Active ................................................................................4-106 Status Messages....................................................................................... 4-107 Unsolicited Messages ............................................................................... 4-108 Switching Languages ......................................................5-1 SmartSwitch .......................................................................................................5-1 Setting SmartSwitch for Different Interfaces ................................................. 5-2 Printer Job Language .........................................................................................5-2 Sniffing................................................................................................................5-3 Flash Memory and Disk ...................................................6-1 Resource Data Collection (Download Target) .................................................... 6-2 Storing Resources on Flash Memory or Disk................................................ 6-3 Viewing the Contents of Flash Memory and Disk...............................................6-3 Password Protection........................................................................................... 6-7 Rewriting the Flash Content ............................................................................... 6-8 Accessing Files with PostScript Emulation......................................................... 6-9 TOC-4 Contents File Naming Conventions .............................................................................. 6-9 Device Search Order................................................................................... 6-12 Performance .....................................................................................................6-13 Job Buffering .................................................................................................... 6-13 Creating a Partition ..................................................................................... 6-14 Enabling Job Buffering ................................................................................ 6-14 Disabling Job Buffering ............................................................................... 6-15 Recovering from a Power Loss ................................................................... 6-15 Printer Specifications ......................................................7-1 Airflow Requirement...................................................................................... 7-1 Noise Emission Levels .................................................................................. 7-1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................ 7-2 Power Requirements..................................................................................... 7-2 Physical Specifications.................................................................................. 7-4 ...................................................................................................................... 7-4 Clearance Requirements ............................................................................. 7-4 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................. 7-5 Altitude Specifications ................................................................................... 7-5 Atmospheric Pressure................................................................................... 7-5 Power On to Ready State Time Period ........................................................7-6 Time to Print the First Page ......................................................................... 7-6 Printer Interfaces..............................................................8-1 Setting Up the Communications Port ................................................................. 8-2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 95/98/Me .................. 8-2 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows NT 4.0 ...................... 8-3 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows 2000 ......................... 8-4 Setting Up the Communications Port Using Windows XP ............................8-5 Deciding Which Interface to Use ........................................................................ 8-6 Parallel Interface................................................................................................. 8-7 Standard Parallel Connector ......................................................................... 8-8 Optional Parallel Connector .......................................................................... 8-8 Parallel Connector Pin Assignments.............................................................8-8 Using the INIT* Signal to Initialize............................................................... 8-11 Computer-to-Printer Communications......................................................... 8-11 TOC-5 Contents Printer-to-Computer Communication (Advanced Status)............................ 8-17 Parallel Mode 1 ........................................................................................... 8-18 Parallel Mode 2 ........................................................................................... 8-19 Signal Descriptions ..................................................................................... 8-19 Serial Interface ................................................................................................. 8-25 Using the RS-232C Serial Interface ............................................................ 8-26 Using the RS-422 Serial Interface............................................................... 8-36 Network Support............................................................................................... 8-42 Input Buffer ....................................................................................................... 8-43 PCL Support .................................................................... A-1 PJL Support ..................................................................... B-1 PostScript Support ......................................................... C-1 Index................................................................................. X-1 1-1 Introduction CHAPTER 1: Introduction Overview The following edition of the Technical Reference contains information about printer commands and printer languages supported by the following Lexmark printers: • • • Lexmark™ C510(n) Lexmark X422 Lexmark E230, E232, E330, E332n, E234(n) To determine which commands and languages your printer supports, see the appendixes in the back of this document or refer to your printer user documentation. If your printer is not included in this edition of the Technical Reference, it may be available in another version. Visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/ publications for more information. 1-2 Introduction Printed documentation is also available for some Lexmark printers. Obtain the correct part number from the following table, call 1-800-553-9727, and select option #1 to order a Technical Reference for your printer. Table 1-1: Technical Reference Documentation Available in Hard Copy If you need a Technical Reference for the... Order Lexmark part number... Optra™ K 11A4079 Optra N 11A9979 Optra SC 11C0905 Optra E310 12A2194 The Technical Reference is divided into the following: Chapter 2: “PCL Emulation” Shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, GL/2 commands, and resident font and symbol set support. Chapter 3: “Printer Job Language” Contains detailed information about certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS), and many other types of commands. Chapter 4: “PostScript Emulation” Provides information about PostScript emulation and explains PostScript emulation supplemental operators. Chapter 5: “Switching Languages” Describes ways to switch printer languages and explains when you may want to choose one method over another. Chapter 6: “Flash Memory and Disk” Provides information about using the flash memory and hard disk. It describes how to manage printer memory, store resources (such as fonts and macros), and manage files. 1-3 Introduction Chapter 7: “Printer Specifications” Lists printer specifications, including information about hardware and environmental conditions. Chapter 8: “Printer Interfaces” Provides information on printer interfaces, including information about parallel and serial interface, network support, and communication protocols. See the tables in the three appendixes to determine if your printer supports a particular PCL emulation, PJL, or PostScript emulation command. The appendixes are: Appendix A: “PCL Support” Appendix B: “PJL Support” Appendix C: “PostScript Support” 1-4 Introduction Navigational Tips If you are not familiar with PDF files, the following tips may help you find the information you need. • To move forward and backward through this document: – Select an option under View in the menu bar at the top of the page. – Use the arrows in the toolbar at the top of the page, or the up arrow and down arrow keys on the keyboard. – Press the Page Up and Page Down keys on the keyboard. – Use the scroll bar to the right of the page. – Click the page number box on the status bar at the bottom of the page and type the page you want. • To increase or decrease the magnification of the pages: – Select the magnifying glass icon on the toolbar at the top of the page and then draw a box around the area you want to view. – Click the magnification box on the status bar and select an option from the drop-down menu. • To jump directly to a particular section or key word in this document: – – – – – Click one of the bookmarks in the overview window to the left of the page. Click a topic in the document’s table of contents. Select Tools from the menu bar and then choose Find or Search. Click the binoculars icon on the toolbar and then type a word in the text box. Click a cross-reference to a figure, page number, or heading in the document itself. Printing the File Although this book was designed primarily for online viewing, you can print a hard copy by clicking File on the toolbar, and then choosing Print. Make sure you’ve selected the correct printer, range of pages, and number of copies before you click OK. You should be aware that if you print this document on a color printer, the color you see on the paper may not match the color you see on your computer monitor. 1-5 Introduction Bibliography For detailed information about PCL emulation printer commands, PostScript emulation printer commands and operators, and interfaces, refer to the following documentation: • Hewlett-Packard DeskJet Printer Family Technical Reference, C2121-90101 • Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4 Typography and Graphics, Random House Electronic Publishing • Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual, 5961-0635 • Hewlett-Packard PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual, 5961-0509 • Hewlett-Packard PostScript SIMM Technical Reference, I/O Device Operators and Parameters, C2080-90921 • Hewlett-Packard Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual, 5961H0512 • IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Interface Technical Reference, S68X-2330 • Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange, Electronic Industries Association, publications EIA RS-232C and EIA\TIA-232-E • Network Printing Alliance Protocol, A Printer/Host Control Specification Developed by the NPA, Level 1, Revision N • PostScript Language Reference Manual (Third Edition), Adobe Systems Incorporated, Addison-Wesley Publishing 2-1 PCL CHAPTER 2: PCL Emulation When you select PCL emulation as the printer language, the printer supports the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet Printer Command Language. This chapter shows how to select PCL emulation and discusses PCL emulation commands, along with resident PCL emulation font and symbol set support. To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix A: “PCL Support” on page A-1. Selecting PCL Emulation Using SmartSwitch When SmartSwitch is enabled for both printer languages on an interface (for example, Parallel, USB, Serial Option 1, or Network Option 1), the printer automatically switches to the printer language being sent by your software program. The printer is shipped with SmartSwitch enabled for both printer languages in all interfaces. The printer examines all print jobs and switches dynamically between PostScript emulation and PCL emulation. Using the Operator Panel or MarkVision Professional If SmartSwitch is set to Off for both printer languages, you can select PCL emulation from your printer operator panel or from MarkVision™ Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for information on changing menu settings. 2-2 PCL Using Your Software Program To select PCL emulation, use the Printer Job Language (PJL) Enter Language Command. See “ENTER LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-3 for more information. See “Printer Job Language” on page 3-1 for the syntax and use of PJL. Warning: When you change printer languages, you may lose some or all previously downloaded resources, unless Resource Save is set to On or the resources are stored in flash memory or on disk. 2-3 PCL Page Formatting The printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation (both portrait and landscape orientation) are illustrated below. See the Legend that follows for definitions of areas A through I. Printable Areas Legend: A Portrait physical page width and landscape physical page length B Portrait physical page length and landscape physical page width C Portrait logical page width D Landscape logical page width E Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in portrait F Distance between the side edge of the physical page and the logical page in landscape G Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and logical page H Distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait, or distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and printable area in landscape I Distance between the top and bottom edge of the physical page and the printable area in portrait, or distance between the left and right edge of the physical page and the printable area in landscape Note: The tables beginning on page 2-4 list the page sizes and dimensions of each area labeled on the preceding diagram for all paper and envelope sizes your printer supports. If information about your printer is not included in the following tables, see page 1-1 for information on how to get a Technical Reference for your printer. 2-4 PCL Lexmark C510(n) The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and envelope sizes the Lexmark C510(n) printer supports. For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas” on page 2-3. Table 2-1: Lexmark C510(n) Paper and Envelope Dimensions Selection Page Size Parm2 Paper/Envelope Dimensions Name mm Dimensions by Area (pels)1 inches A B C D E F G H I Paper 13, 613 A5 12, 45, 612 JIS B5 Paper 148 x 210 5.83 x 8.27 3496 4960 3196 4720 142 118 0 100 100 182 x 257 7.2 x 10.1 4300 6070 4000 5830 150 120 0 100 100 A4 (198 mm) 3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4676 6778 142 118 0 80 80 26, 626 A4 (203 mm) 3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4800 6778 80 118 0 80 80 1, 601 Executive 184 x 267 7.25 x 10.5 4350 6300 4050 6060 150 120 0 100 100 2, 602 Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 5100 6600 4800 6360 150 120 0 100 100 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 100 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 5100 7800 4800 7560 150 120 0 100 100 139.7 x 215.9 5.5 x 8.5 3300 5100 3000 4860 150 120 0 100 100 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8500 4800 8260 150 120 0 100 100 26, 626 5 3, 603 Legal 4 or 10 Folio5 15 Statement 101 Universal 5 Envelope 90 91 4 99 , 100 DL 220 x 110 8.66 x 4.33 2598 5196 2314 4960 142 118 0 100 100 C5 229 x 162 9.02 x 6.38 3826 5408 3542 5172 142 118 0 100 100 250 x 176 9.84 x 6.93 4156 5904 3872 5668 142 118 0 100 100 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 412 B5 Envelope 5 600 Other Envelope 89 9 (Com 9) 225 x 98 8.875 x 3.875 2326 5324 2024 5084 150 120 0 100 100 81 10 (Com 10) 241 x 105 9.5 x 4.125 2474 5700 2174 5460 150 120 0 100 100 1 Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi. Page Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64. 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application. 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039. 5 The Lexmark C510(n) supports this size media only with an optional legal tray. 2 Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6. 2-5 PCL Lexmark X422 The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and envelope sizes the Lexmark X422 printer supports. For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas” on page 2-3. Table 2-2: Lexmark X422 Paper and Envelope Dimensions Selection Page Size Parm2 Paper/Envelope Dimensions Name mm Dimensions by Area (pels)1 inches A B C D E F G H I Paper 13, 613 A5 12, 45, 612 JIS B5 Paper 148 x 210 5.83 x 8.27 3496 4960 3196 4720 142 118 0 100 100 182 x 257 7.2 x 10.1 4300 6070 4000 5830 150 120 0 100 100 A4 (198 mm) 3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4676 6778 142 118 0 80 80 26, 626 A4 (203 mm) 3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4800 6778 80 118 0 80 80 1, 601 Executive 184 x 267 7.25 x 10.5 4350 6300 4050 6060 150 120 0 100 100 2, 602 Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 5100 6600 4800 6360 150 120 0 100 100 3, 603 Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 100 4 or 10 Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 5100 7800 4800 7560 150 120 0 100 100 15 Statement 139.7 x 215.9 5.5 x 8.5 3300 5100 3000 4860 150 120 0 100 100 101 Universal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8500 4800 8260 150 120 0 100 100 26, 626 Envelope 90 DL 220 x 110 8.66 x 4.33 2598 5196 2314 4960 142 118 0 100 100 C5 229 x 162 9.02 x 6.38 3826 5408 3542 5172 142 118 0 100 100 99 , 100 B5 Envelope 250 x 176 9.84 x 6.93 4156 5904 3872 5668 142 118 0 100 100 600 Other Envelope 229 x 356 9.02 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 100 80 7-3/4 Monarch 191 x 98 7.5 x 3.875 2326 4500 2024 4260 150 120 0 100 100 89 9 (Com 9) 225 x 98 8.875 x 3.875 2326 5324 2024 5084 150 120 0 100 100 81 10 (Com 10) 241 x 105 9.5 x 4.125 2474 5700 2174 5460 150 120 0 100 100 91 4 1 Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi. Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64. 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application. 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039. 2 Page Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6. 2-6 PCL Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n The following table lists page sizes and print area dimensions for all paper and envelope sizes the Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, and E332n printer supports. For more information about the printable areas and logical pages for PCL emulation, see “Printable Areas” on page 2-3. Table 2-3: Lexmark E230, E232, E234(n), E330, E332n Paper and Envelope Dimensions Paper/Envelope Dimensions Selection Page Size Parm2 Name mm Dimensions by Area (pels)1 inches A B C D E F G H I J K L Paper 13, 613 A5 12, 45, 612 JIS B5 Paper 26, 626 148 x 210 5.83 x 8.27 3496 4960 3196 4720 142 118 0 100 100 100 100 300 182 x 257 7.2 x 10.1 4300 6070 4000 5830 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4676 6778 142 118 0 80 80 100 100 300 mm)3 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 4960 7014 4800 6778 80 118 0 80 80 100 100 300 A4 (198 mm) 26, 626 A4 (203 1, 601 Executive 184 x 267 7.25 x 10.5 4350 6300 4050 6060 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 2, 602 Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 5100 6600 4800 6360 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 3, 603 Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 4 or 10 Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 5100 7800 4800 7560 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 15 Statement 139.7 x 215.9 5.5 x 8.5 3300 5100 3000 4860 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 101 Universal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8500 4800 8260 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 Envelope 90 DL 220 x 110 8.66 x 4.33 2598 5196 2314 4960 142 118 0 100 100 100 100 300 C5 229 x 162 9.02 x 6.38 3826 5408 3542 5172 142 118 0 100 100 100 100 300 99 , 100 B5 Envelope 250 x 176 9.84 x 6.93 4156 5904 3872 5668 142 118 0 100 100 100 100 300 600 Other Envelope 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 5100 8400 4800 8160 150 120 0 100 412 100 100 300 89 9 (Com 9) 225 x 98 8.875 x 3.875 2326 5324 2024 5084 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 81 10 (Com 10) 241 x 105 9.5 x 4.125 2474 5700 2174 5460 150 120 0 100 100 100 100 300 1 1 1 91 4 1 Pel dimensions are for 600 dpi. Size Parameters are explained in Table 2-30 on page 2-64. 3 The width of the logical page for A4 paper can be changed from the printer operator panel or your software application. 4 Paper ID 99 will be supported for backward compatibility with other Lexmark printers. Paper ID 99 has the same logical paper size as ID 100 (compatible with HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx) but is 8 pels wider than the Lexmark 4039. 2 Page Note: The explanation of the printable area assumes the Print Area menu item is set to Normal. For more information about Print Area, see page 2-6. 2-7 PCL Print Area Menu Item The printable area is the area on a sheet of paper within which a pel can be printed. Logical page is a conceptual entity that defines the area in which margins (top, bottom, left, right) may be set and the area in which the PCL cursor may be positioned. The physical page border is the actual physical boundaries of a page. The Print Area menu item is available from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. For some printers, Print Area supports three values: Normal, Whole Page, and Fit to Page. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. Normal setting Whole Page setting Legend: PCL Logical Page Area Physical Page Border PCL Printable Area Only Portrait Orientation shown for all settings The Normal setting, which is the factory default, means the printable area includes the entire page except the narrow border around the edge of the page. This is the nonprintable area. The printer measures margin settings relative to the logical page. For a more detailed explanation of the Normal setting, see “Printable Areas” on page 2-3. 2-8 PCL The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed when using PCL emulation. If Whole Page is selected, the PCL language sets the logical page area equal to the physical page dimensions. Since the logical page dimensions and the physical page dimensions are the same, in theory, the cursor may be positioned anywhere on the page. However, the PCL language clips the image to the printable area. So, the Whole Page setting is useful for printing scanned images that extend from edge to edge of a page. Some printers offer the Fit to Page setting. When Fit to Page is selected, PCL emulation or PostScript emulation formats a page using a printable area equal to the physical page, which is from one edge of the page to the other edge of the page. If you use this setting, no clipping occurs. In Fit to Page, the PCL emulation logical page dimensions are equal to the physical page dimensions, as in the Whole Page setting. The printer holds this formatted image in memory, but when the page prints, the image is compressed a small amount in both horizontal and vertical directions, and then centered on the physical page for letter-size paper only. This process creates a small margin around the image. This artificial margin prevents printing from one edge to the other, since doing so could contaminate the printer and cause printing problems. The following illustrations show an image held in memory for printing from one edge to the other and how the image would actually print based on the Fit to Page setting. Notice that a small border appears at the edges of the printed page, and the image is slightly compressed. Physical Page Edge Formatted Image with Fit to Page Printed Image with Fit to Page 2-9 PCL Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422 Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the font sample pages from the MFP control panel, using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83.) or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 symbol sets. The tables beginning on page 2-15 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets. You can select a font as the PCL emulation default from the MFP control panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 through R46) shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47 through R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The last five fonts (R86 through R90) include three different Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, OCR-A and OCR-B fonts. The fonts are further divided into font groups A, B, and C indicating which symbol sets are supported by each font. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, as well as the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, see Table 2-4 on page 2-10. For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-5 on page 2-13. Both tables list the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands and the font group (A, B, or C) for each font. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see page 2-10. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-15. For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information. 2-10 PCL You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or 76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning on page 2-15 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default. Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER, PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See Table 3-5: “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands. Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark X422 Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers. Standard PCL Emulation Fonts, OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts Table 2-4 on page 2-10 lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Most fonts are assigned a font group indicating which symbol sets that font supports. To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-4, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for the symbol sets that belong to that group. Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group Courier 0 0 4099 A Courier Italic 1 0 4099 A Courier Bold 0 3 4099 A Courier Bold Italic 1 3 4099 A 1 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-11 PCL Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group CG Times 0 0 4101 A CG Times Italic 1 0 4101 A CG Times Bold 0 3 4101 A CG Times Bold Italic 1 3 4101 A Univers Medium 0 0 4148 A Univers Medium Italic 1 0 4148 A Univers Bold 0 3 4148 A Univers Bold Italic 1 3 4148 A Letter Gothic 0 0 4102 B Letter Gothic Italic 1 0 4102 B Letter Gothic Bold 0 3 4102 B Univers Condensed Medium 4 0 4148 B Univers Condensed Medium Italic 5 0 4148 B Univers Condensed Bold 4 3 4148 B Univers Condensed Bold Italic 5 3 4148 B Garamond Antiqua 0 0 4197 B Garamond Kursiv 1 0 4197 B Garamond Halbfett 0 3 4197 B Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 1 3 4197 B CG Omega 0 0 4113 B CG Omega Italic 1 0 4113 B CG Omega Bold 0 3 4113 B CG Omega Bold Italic 1 3 4113 B Antique Olive 0 0 4168 B Antique Olive Italic 1 0 4168 B Antique Olive Bold 0 3 4168 B Albertus Medium 0 1 4362 B Albertus Extra Bold 0 4 4362 B Clarendon Condensed Bold 4 3 4140 B Marigold 0 0 4297 B Coronet 1 0 4116 B 1 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-12 PCL Table 2-4: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group Times New Roman 0 0 16901 B Times New Roman Italic 1 0 16901 B Times New Roman Bold 0 3 16901 B Times New Roman BoldItalic 1 3 16901 B Arial 0 0 16602 B Arial Italic 1 0 16602 B Arial Bold 0 3 16602 B Arial Bold Italic 1 3 16602 B Symbol1 0 0 16686 Wingdings1 0 0 31402 Line Printer 161 0 0 0 POSTNET Bar Code1 0 0 0 OCR-A1 0 0 23584 1 0 0 23590 C39 Narrow1 0 0 32774 Regular1 0 0 32772 0 0 32777 OCR-B C39 C39 Wide 1 1 A D For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-13 PCL Type 1 Fonts Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software application selects these fonts. The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted. To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-5, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for the symbol sets that belong to that group. Table 2-5: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Style Bold Typeface Style Bold Typeface Font Group ITC Avant Garde Book 0 0 24607 0 0 61471 B 1 0 24607 1 0 61471 B 0 2 24607 0 3 61471 B 1 2 24607 1 3 61471 B ITC Bookman Light 0 -3 24623 0 -3 61487 B ITC Bookman Light Italic 1 -3 24623 1 -3 61487 B ITC Bookman Demi 0 2 24623 0 2 61487 B ITC Bookman Demi Italic 1 2 24623 1 2 61487 B Century Schoolbook Roman 0 0 24703 0 0 61463 B Century Schoolbook Italic 1 0 24703 1 0 61463 B Century Schoolbook Bold 0 3 24703 0 3 61463 B Century Schoolbook Bold Italic 1 3 24703 1 3 61463 B Helvetica 0 0 24580 0 0 61444 B Helvetica Italic 1 0 24580 1 0 61444 B Helvetica Bold 0 3 24580 0 3 61444 B Helvetica Bold Italic 1 3 24580 1 3 61444 B Helvetica Narrow 4 0 24580 4 0 61444 B ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi 1 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique 1 1 Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2 2-14 PCL Table 2-5: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued) Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Style Bold Typeface Style Bold Typeface Font Group Helvetica Narrow Italic 5 0 24580 5 0 61444 B Helvetica Narrow Bold 4 3 24580 4 3 61444 B Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic 5 3 24580 5 3 61444 B Helvetica Light 2 0 -3 24580 0 -3 61444 C 1 -3 24580 1 -3 61444 C 0 5 24580 0 5 61444 C Helvetica Black Oblique 2 1 5 24580 1 5 61444 C Palatino Roman 0 0 24591 0 0 61455 B Palatino Italic 1 0 24591 1 0 61455 B Palatino Bold 0 3 24591 0 3 61455 B Palatino Bold Italic 1 3 24591 1 3 61455 B 1 0 45099 1 0 61483 B 0 0 45101 0 0 61485 CourierPS 0 0 24579 B CourierPS Oblique 1 0 24579 B CourierPS Bold 0 3 24579 B CourierPS Bold Oblique 1 3 24579 B Times Roman 0 0 25093 B Times Italic 1 0 25093 B Times Bold 0 3 25093 B Times Bold Italic 1 3 25093 B 0 0 45358 Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black 2 2 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats SymbolPS 1 3 3 Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2 2-15 PCL Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility modes are: Forward ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6 @PJL RESET Backward ESC %-12345X ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5 @PJL RESET ESC %-12345X Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark X422 To determine which symbol sets a font or typeface from Table 2-4 or Table 2-5 supports, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables. Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Symbol Set Symbol Set ID Roman Extension 0E Roman-8 8U PC-8 Code Page 437 Font Group PJL Value A B C D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ROMAN8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 10U PC8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) 11U PC8DN ✓ ✓ PC-850 Multilingual 12U PC850 ✓ ✓ PC-852 Latin 2 17U PC852 ✓ ✓ PC-8 Turkish (437T) 9T PC8TK ✓ ✓ PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) 26U ✓ ✓ PC-1004 OS/2 9J ✓ ✓ Legal 1U LEGAL ✓ ✓ DeskTop 7J DESKTOP ✓ ✓ MC Text 12J ✓ ✓ ✓ PS Text 10J ✓ ✓ ✓ PSTEXT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2-16 PCL Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued) ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Font Group Symbol Set Symbol Set ID PJL Value A B PS Math 5M PSMATH ✓ ✓ Math-8 8M MATH8 ✓ ✓ Pi Font 15U PIFONT ✓ ✓ Microsoft Publishing 6J MSPUBL ✓ ✓ Windows 3.0 Latin 1 9U WIN30 ✓ Windows Latin 1 19U WINL1 Windows Latin 2 9E Windows Latin 5 5T Windows Latin 6 (Baltic) 19L ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 0N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 C D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ WINL2 ✓ ✓ WINL5 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ISOL1 ✓ ✓ 2N ISOL2 ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 5N ISOL5 ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 6N ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 9N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-858 Multilingual Euro 13U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Roman-9 4U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura International 13J VNINTL ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura US 14J VNUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura Math 6M VNMATH ✓ ✓ PC-861 Iceland 21U ✓ ✓ PC-863 Canadian French 23U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-865 Nordic 25U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-860 Portugal 20U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ABICOMP International 14P ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal 13P ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-8 PC Nova 27Q ✓ ✓ PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) 16U ✓ ✓ Turkish-8 8T ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2-17 PCL Table 2-6: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued) ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Font Group Symbol Set Symbol Set ID PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U ✓ PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q ✓ Windows Cyrillic 9R ✓ ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic 10N ✓ PC-866 Cyrillic 3R ✓ PC-855 Cyrillic 10R ✓ Russian-GOST 12R ✓ PC-8 Bulgarian 13R ✓ Ukrainian 14R ✓ Windows Greek 9G ✓ ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek 12N ✓ PC-869 Greece 11G ✓ PC-851 Greece 10G ✓ PC-8 Latin/Greek 12G ✓ Greek-8 8G ✓ PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) 14G ✓ PJL Value A B Table 2-7: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set Symbol Set ID Fonts PC-911 Katakana 3K Line Printer 16 Symbol 19M Symbol, SymbolPS Wingdings 579L Wingding POSTNET Bar Code 15Y POSTNET Bar Code Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L ITC Zapf Dingbats PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L ITC Zapf Dingbats PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 14L ITC Zapf Dingbats C39 Bar Code (Uppercase) 9Y Code 3 of 9 C39 Bar Code (plus Lowercase) 109Y Code 3 of 9 C D ✓ 2-18 PCL Table 2-7: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Fonts C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y Code 3 of 9 OCR-A 0O OCR-A OCR-B 1O OCR-B Symbol Set All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets. Table 2-8: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Symbol Set 1E ISO 4: United Kingdom 0U ISO 6: ASCII 0S ISO 11: Swedish for Names 0I ISO 15: Italian 2S ISO 17: Spanish 1G ISO 21: German 0D ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1 1F ISO 69: French 2U ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) 0F ISO 25: French 0G ISO: HP German 0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57: Chinese 3S ISO 10: Swedish 1S ISO: HP Spanish 6S ISO 85: Spanish 4S ISO 16: Portuguese 5S ISO 84: Portuguese 1D ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2 2-19 PCL Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n) Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the font sample pages from the printer operator panel, using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83.) or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 symbol sets. The tables beginning on page 2-15 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets. You can select a font as the PCL emulation default from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 through R46) shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47 through R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The last five fonts (R86 through R90) include three different Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, OCR-A and OCR-B fonts. The fonts are further divided into font groups A, B, and C indicating which symbol sets are supported by each font. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, as well as the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts, see Table 2-4 on page 2-10. For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-5 on page 2-13. Both tables list the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands and the font group (A, B, or C) for each font. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see page 2-10. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-15. For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information. 2-20 PCL You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or 76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning on page 2-15 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default. Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER, PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See Table 3-5: “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands. Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark C510(n) Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers. Standard PCL Emulation Fonts, OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts Table 2-4 on page 2-10 lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, the OCR and Code 3 of 9 bar code fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Most fonts are assigned a font group indicating which symbol sets that font supports. To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-4, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for the symbol sets that belong to that group. Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group Courier 0 0 4099 A Courier Italic 1 0 4099 A Courier Bold 0 3 4099 A 1 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-21 PCL Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group Courier Bold Italic 1 3 4099 A CG Times 0 0 4101 A CG Times Italic 1 0 4101 A CG Times Bold 0 3 4101 A CG Times Bold Italic 1 3 4101 A Univers Medium 0 0 4148 A Univers Medium Italic 1 0 4148 A Univers Bold 0 3 4148 A Univers Bold Italic 1 3 4148 A Letter Gothic 0 0 4102 B Letter Gothic Italic 1 0 4102 B Letter Gothic Bold 0 3 4102 B Univers Condensed Medium 4 0 4148 B Univers Condensed Medium Italic 5 0 4148 B Univers Condensed Bold 4 3 4148 B Univers Condensed Bold Italic 5 3 4148 B Garamond Antiqua 0 0 4197 B Garamond Kursiv 1 0 4197 B Garamond Halbfett 0 3 4197 B Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 1 3 4197 B CG Omega 0 0 4113 B CG Omega Italic 1 0 4113 B CG Omega Bold 0 3 4113 B CG Omega Bold Italic 1 3 4113 B Antique Olive 0 0 4168 B Antique Olive Italic 1 0 4168 B Antique Olive Bold 0 3 4168 B Albertus Medium 0 1 4362 B Albertus Extra Bold 0 4 4362 B Clarendon Condensed Bold 4 3 4140 B Marigold 0 0 4297 B 1 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-22 PCL Table 2-9: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Style Bold Typeface Font Group Coronet 1 0 4116 B Times New Roman 0 0 16901 B Times New Roman Italic 1 0 16901 B Times New Roman Bold 0 3 16901 B Times New Roman BoldItalic 1 3 16901 B Arial 0 0 16602 B Arial Italic 1 0 16602 B Arial Bold 0 3 16602 B Arial Bold Italic 1 3 16602 B Symbol1 0 0 16686 Wingdings1 0 0 31402 0 0 0 Line Printer 161 POSTNET Bar Code1 0 0 0 1 0 0 23584 OCR-B1 0 0 23590 0 0 32774 0 0 32772 0 0 32777 OCR-A C39 Narrow1 C39 Regular C39 1 Wide1 1 A D For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2-23 PCL Type 1 Fonts Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software application selects these fonts. The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted. To determine which symbol sets are supported by a particular font, find the font group (A, B, or C) for the font in Table 2-5, and then see Table 2-6 on page 2-15 for the symbol sets that belong to that group. Table 2-10: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Style Bold Typeface Style Bold Typeface Font Group ITC Avant Garde Book 0 0 24607 0 0 61471 B 1 0 24607 1 0 61471 B 0 2 24607 0 3 61471 B 1 2 24607 1 3 61471 B ITC Bookman Light 0 -3 24623 0 -3 61487 B ITC Bookman Light Italic 1 -3 24623 1 -3 61487 B ITC Bookman Demi 0 2 24623 0 2 61487 B ITC Bookman Demi Italic 1 2 24623 1 2 61487 B Century Schoolbook Roman 0 0 24703 0 0 61463 B Century Schoolbook Italic 1 0 24703 1 0 61463 B Century Schoolbook Bold 0 3 24703 0 3 61463 B Century Schoolbook Bold Italic 1 3 24703 1 3 61463 B Helvetica 0 0 24580 0 0 61444 B Helvetica Italic 1 0 24580 1 0 61444 B Helvetica Bold 0 3 24580 0 3 61444 B Helvetica Bold Italic 1 3 24580 1 3 61444 B Helvetica Narrow 4 0 24580 4 0 61444 B ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Demi 1 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique 1 1 Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2 2-24 PCL Table 2-10: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued) Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Style Bold Typeface Style Bold Typeface Font Group Helvetica Narrow Italic 5 0 24580 5 0 61444 B Helvetica Narrow Bold 4 3 24580 4 3 61444 B Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic 5 3 24580 5 3 61444 B Helvetica Light 2 0 -3 24580 0 -3 61444 C 1 -3 24580 1 -3 61444 C 0 5 24580 0 5 61444 C Helvetica Black Oblique 2 1 5 24580 1 5 61444 C Palatino Roman 0 0 24591 0 0 61455 B Palatino Italic 1 0 24591 1 0 61455 B Palatino Bold 0 3 24591 0 3 61455 B Palatino Bold Italic 1 3 24591 1 3 61455 B 1 0 45099 1 0 61483 B 0 0 45101 0 0 61485 CourierPS 0 0 24579 B CourierPS Oblique 1 0 24579 B CourierPS Bold 0 3 24579 B CourierPS Bold Oblique 1 3 24579 B Times Roman 0 0 25093 B Times Italic 1 0 25093 B Times Bold 0 3 25093 B Times Bold Italic 1 3 25093 B 0 0 45358 Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Black 2 2 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats SymbolPS 1 3 3 Notice the values for forward compatibility and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 For the symbol sets supported by this font, see Table 2-7: “Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets” on page 2-17. 2 2-25 PCL Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility modes are: Forward ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6 @PJL RESET Backward ESC %-12345X ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5 @PJL RESET ESC %-12345X Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark C510(n) To determine which symbol sets a font or typeface from Table 2-4 or Table 2-5 supports, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables. Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Symbol Set Symbol Set ID Roman Extension 0E Roman-8 8U PC-8 Code Page 437 Font Group PJL Value A B C D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ROMAN8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 10U PC8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) 11U PC8DN ✓ ✓ PC-850 Multilingual 12U PC850 ✓ ✓ PC-852 Latin 2 17U PC852 ✓ ✓ PC-8 Turkish (437T) 9T PC8TK ✓ ✓ PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) 26U ✓ ✓ PC-1004 OS/2 9J ✓ ✓ Legal 1U LEGAL ✓ ✓ DeskTop 7J DESKTOP ✓ ✓ MC Text 12J ✓ ✓ ✓ PS Text 10J ✓ ✓ ✓ PSTEXT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2-26 PCL Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued) ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Font Group Symbol Set Symbol Set ID PJL Value A B PS Math 5M PSMATH ✓ ✓ Math-8 8M MATH8 ✓ ✓ Pi Font 15U PIFONT ✓ ✓ Microsoft Publishing 6J MSPUBL ✓ ✓ Windows 3.0 Latin 1 9U WIN30 ✓ Windows Latin 1 19U WINL1 Windows Latin 2 9E Windows Latin 5 5T Windows Latin 6 (Baltic) 19L ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 0N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 C D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ WINL2 ✓ ✓ WINL5 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ISOL1 ✓ ✓ 2N ISOL2 ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 5N ISOL5 ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 6N ✓ ✓ ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 9N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-858 Multilingual Euro 13U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Roman-9 4U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura International 13J VNINTL ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura US 14J VNUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Ventura Math 6M VNMATH ✓ ✓ PC-861 Iceland 21U ✓ ✓ PC-863 Canadian French 23U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-865 Nordic 25U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-860 Portugal 20U ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ABICOMP International 14P ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal 13P ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PC-8 PC Nova 27Q ✓ ✓ PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) 16U ✓ ✓ Turkish-8 8T ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2-27 PCL Table 2-11: Symbol Set Support for PCL Emulation Text Fonts (Continued) ✓ Indicates the symbol set is supported by the fonts in the font group. Font Group Symbol Set Symbol Set ID PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U ✓ PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q ✓ Windows Cyrillic 9R ✓ ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic 10N ✓ PC-866 Cyrillic 3R ✓ PC-855 Cyrillic 10R ✓ Russian-GOST 12R ✓ PC-8 Bulgarian 13R ✓ Ukrainian 14R ✓ Windows Greek 9G ✓ ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek 12N ✓ PC-869 Greece 11G ✓ PC-851 Greece 10G ✓ PC-8 Latin/Greek 12G ✓ Greek-8 8G ✓ PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) 14G ✓ PJL Value A B Table 2-12: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set Symbol Set ID Fonts PC-911 Katakana 3K Line Printer 16 Symbol 19M Symbol, SymbolPS Wingdings 579L Wingding POSTNET Bar Code 15Y POSTNET Bar Code Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L ITC Zapf Dingbats PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L ITC Zapf Dingbats PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 14L ITC Zapf Dingbats C39 Bar Code (Uppercase) 9Y Code 3 of 9 C39 Bar Code (plus Lowercase) 109Y Code 3 of 9 C D ✓ 2-28 PCL Table 2-12: Non-Text PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Fonts C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y Code 3 of 9 OCR-A 0O OCR-A OCR-B 1O OCR-B Symbol Set All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets. Table 2-13: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Symbol Set 1E ISO 4: United Kingdom 0U ISO 6: ASCII 0S ISO 11: Swedish for Names 0I ISO 15: Italian 2S ISO 17: Spanish 1G ISO 21: German 0D ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1 1F ISO 69: French 2U ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) 0F ISO 25: French 0G ISO: HP German 0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57: Chinese 3S ISO 10: Swedish 1S ISO: HP Spanish 6S ISO 85: Spanish 4S ISO 16: Portuguese 5S ISO 84: Portuguese 1D ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2 2-29 PCL Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E230, E232 Your printer supports 19 fonts in PCL emulation, including 17 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. Print the font sample pages to view the specific parameters for each font. For scalable fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the font sample pages using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83). A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters. Your printer has 83 resident symbol sets. The tables beginning on page 2-32 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets. You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or 18 from font identifiers R0 or R18. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning on page 2-32 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default. Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER, PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See “Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands. 2-30 PCL Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E230, E232 Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers. Standard PCL Emulation Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 14 standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Table 2-14: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Courier 0 0 0 4099 Courier Italic 0 1 0 4099 Courier Bold 0 0 3 4099 Courier Bold Italic 0 1 3 4099 Times New Roman 1 0 0 16901 Times New Roman Italic 1 1 0 16901 Times New Roman Bold 1 0 3 16901 Times New Roman BoldItalic 1 1 3 16901 Arial 1 0 0 16602 Arial Italic 1 1 0 16602 Arial Bold 1 0 3 16602 Arial Bold Italic 1 1 3 16602 Line Printer 16 0 0 0 0 POSTNET Barcode 1 1 0 0 0 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 2-31 PCL Specialty PCL Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Table 2-15: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface C39 Narrow 1 1 0 0 32774 1 0 0 32772 C39 Regular C39 Wide 1 1 1 0 0 32777 1 0 0 0 23584 OCR-B 1 0 0 0 23590 OCR-A 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 2-32 PCL Selecting Symbol Sets for Lexmark E230, E232 To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: “Table 2-16: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1” on page 2-32, “Table 2-17: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek” on page 2-34, and “Table 2-18: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials” on page 2-35. Table 2-16: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US Courier Italic MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U Courier Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 2-33 PCL Table 2-16: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US C39 Narrow MC Text ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U POSTNET Barcode Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 2-34 PCL Table 2-17: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) 18U 9T PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic Symbol Set ID 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 Courier ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman BoldItalic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ POSTNET Barcode ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Narrow ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 2-35 PCL Table 2-18: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O Courier ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Italic ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Bold ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman BoldItalic ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Italic ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Bold ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Bold Italic ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ POSTNET Barcode ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Narrow ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials 2-36 PCL All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets. Table 2-19: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Symbol Set / Typeface 1E ISO 4: United Kingdom 0U ISO 6: ASCII 0S ISO 11: Swedish for Names 0I ISO 15: Italian 2S ISO 17: Spanish 1G ISO 21: German 0D ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1 1F ISO 69: French 2U ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) 0F ISO 25: French 0G ISO: HP German 0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57: Chinese 3S ISO 10: Swedish 1S ISO: HP Spanish 6S ISO 85: Spanish 4S ISO 16: Portuguese 5S ISO 84: Portuguese 1D ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2 2-37 PCL Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, E332n Your printer has 91 resident fonts in PCL emulation, including 89 scalable fonts and two bitmapped fonts. Several parameters are used to select a font from the data stream. These include symbol set, spacing, point or pitch, style, weight, and typeface number. For scalable fonts, you can vary the size of a font by specifying pitch or point size. For bitmapped fonts, you must choose the pitch or point size listed on the font sample pages. You can print the font sample pages using a PJL command (see “LPRINTPCLFONTS” on page 3-83), or through MarkVision Professional (network models only). Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. A symbol set defines which characters are available for a font and the code point for each of these characters. Your printer supports 88 resident symbol sets. The tables beginning on page 2-43 show the symbol sets available for each font in PCL emulation. Not all fonts support all symbol sets. You can select a font as the PCL emulation default through MarkVision Professional (network models only). Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. The fonts are divided into three major groups. The first 47 fonts (R0 to R46) shown on the font sample pages are the standard PCL emulation fonts. The next 39 fonts (R47 to R85) are called Type 1 fonts and were originally defined for PostScript emulation, but now also work in the PCL emulation. The final five fonts (R86 to R90) are additional specialty PCL fonts. For a list of the 47 standard PCL emulation fonts, see Table 2-20 on page 2-38. For a list of the 39 Type 1 fonts, see Table 2-21 on page 2-40. For a list of the five additional specialty PCL fonts, see Table 2-22 on page 2-42. These tables list both the forward and backward compatibility font selection commands. For more information on forward and backward compatibility, see page 2-38. For more information on selecting symbol sets, see page 2-43. For compatibility purposes, you can disable Type 1 fonts with the Printer Job Language (PJL) LTYPE1FONTS command. The factory default for these fonts is Enabled. See LTYPE1FONTS on page 3-47 for more information. You can also select fonts using PJL commands. The selection parameter is the number portion from the font identifier shown on the font sample pages, such as 0 or 76 from font identifiers R0 or R76. Use the PJL values shown in the tables beginning 2-38 PCL on page 2-43 to select a symbol set. If a symbol set does not have a PJL value, use the symbol set ID to select the symbol set. A font selection can be either temporary or set as the default. Use the following PJL commands to select fonts: FONTSOURCE, FONTNUMBER, PITCH, PTSIZE, SYMSET, SET, DEFAULT. See “Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48 for more information about these commands. Forward and Backward Compatibility Modes for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n Your PCL emulation has forward and backward compatibility modes. The forward compatibility mode is used to emulate the fonts in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. The backward compatibility mode is used for compatibility with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 5 and the Lexmark family of printers. Standard PCL Emulation Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the 47standard PCL emulation fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Courier 0 0 0 4099 Courier Italic 0 1 0 4099 Courier Bold 0 0 3 4099 Courier Bold Italic 0 1 3 4099 CG Times 1 0 0 4101 CG Times Italic 1 1 0 4101 CG Times Bold 1 0 3 4101 CG Times Bold Italic 1 1 3 4101 Univers Medium 1 0 0 4148 Univers Medium Italic 1 1 0 4148 Univers Bold 1 0 3 4148 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 2-39 PCL Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued) Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Univers Bold Italic 1 1 3 4148 Times New Roman 1 0 0 16901 Times New Roman Italic 1 1 0 16901 Times New Roman Bold 1 0 3 16901 Times New Roman BoldItalic 1 1 3 16901 Arial 1 0 0 16602 Arial Italic 1 1 0 16602 Arial Bold 1 0 3 16602 Arial Bold Italic 1 1 3 16602 Letter Gothic 0 0 0 4102 Letter Gothic Italic 0 1 0 4102 Letter Gothic Bold 0 0 3 4102 Univers Condensed Medium 1 4 0 4148 Univers Condensed Medium Italic 1 5 0 4148 Univers Condensed Bold 1 4 3 4148 Univers Condensed Bold Italic 1 5 3 4148 Garamond Antiqua 1 0 0 4197 Garamond Kursiv 1 1 0 4197 Garamond Halbfett 1 0 3 4197 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 1 1 3 4197 CG Omega 1 0 0 4113 CG Omega Italic 1 1 0 4113 CG Omega Bold 1 0 3 4113 CG Omega Bold Italic 1 1 3 4113 Antique Olive 1 0 0 4168 Antique Olive Italic 1 1 0 4168 Antique Olive Bold 1 0 3 4168 Albertus Medium 1 0 1 4362 Albertus Extra Bold 1 0 4 4362 Clarendon Condensed Bold 1 4 3 4140 Marigold 1 0 0 4297 Coronet 1 1 0 4116 Line Printer 16 0 0 0 0 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 2-40 PCL Table 2-20: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued) Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface 1 0 0 0 Wingdings 1 0 0 31402 Symbol 1 0 0 16686 POSTNET Barcode 1 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. Type 1 Fonts Thirty of the Type 1 fonts have different font selection parameters in the forward and backward compatibility modes and 9 of the fonts work only in the forward compatibility mode. With the appropriate printer driver installed and selected, your software program selects these fonts. The following table shows the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility modes and indicates the font group for each font. All Type 1 fonts are supported by both the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050 and the Lexmark family of printers unless otherwise noted. Table 2-21: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Style Weight Typeface Helvetica 1 0 0 24580 1 0 0 61444 Helvetica Italic 1 1 0 24580 1 1 0 61444 Helvetica Bold 1 0 3 24580 1 0 3 61444 Helvetica Bold Italic 1 1 3 24580 1 1 3 61444 Helvetica Narrow 1 4 0 24580 1 4 0 61444 Helvetica Narrow Italic 1 5 0 24580 1 5 0 61444 Helvetica Narrow Bold 1 4 3 24580 1 4 3 61444 Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic 1 5 3 24580 1 5 3 61444 Palatino Roman 1 0 0 24591 1 0 0 61455 Palatino Italic 1 1 0 24591 1 1 0 61455 Palatino Bold 1 0 3 24591 1 0 3 61455 Palatino Bold Italic 1 1 3 24591 1 1 3 61455 1 Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers. 2 2-41 PCL Table 2-21: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands (Continued) Forward Compatibility Mode Backward Compatibility Mode Type 1 Font name Spacing Style Weight Typeface Spacing Style Weight Typeface ITC Bookman Light 1 0 -3 24623 1 0 -3 61487 ITC Bookman Light Italic 1 1 -3 24623 1 1 -3 61487 ITC Bookman Demi 1 0 2 24623 1 0 2 61487 ITC Bookman Demi Italic 1 1 2 24623 1 1 2 61487 ITC Avant Garde Book 1 0 0 24607 1 0 0 61471 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique 1 1 0 24607 1 1 0 61471 1 0 2 24607 1 0 3 61471 1 1 2 24607 1 1 3 61471 Century Schoolbook Roman 1 0 0 24703 1 0 0 61463 Century Schoolbook Italic 1 1 0 24703 1 1 0 61463 Century Schoolbook Bold 1 0 3 24703 1 0 3 61463 Century Schoolbook Bold Italic 1 1 3 24703 1 1 3 61463 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic 1 1 0 45099 1 1 0 61483 CourierPS 3 0 0 0 24579 0 1 0 24579 0 0 3 24579 0 1 3 24579 Times Roman 3 1 0 0 25093 Times Italic 3 1 1 0 25093 1 0 3 25093 1 1 3 25093 Helvetica Light 2 1 0 -3 24580 1 0 -3 61444 Helvetica Light Oblique 2 1 1 -3 24580 1 1 -3 61444 1 0 5 24580 1 0 5 61444 1 1 5 24580 1 1 5 61444 SymbolPS 3 1 0 0 45358 ITC Zapf Dingbats 1 0 0 45101 1 0 0 61485 ITC Avant Garde Demi 1 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold 3 3 CourierPS Bold Oblique Times Bold 3 Times Bold Italic Helvetica Black 3 2 Helvetica Black Oblique 1 3 2 1 Notice the values for forward and backward compatibility modes differ slightly for Bold. This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 3 This font is not implemented in the Lexmark family of printers. 2 2-42 PCL Your Lexmark printer defaults to the forward compatibility mode to enable a Hewlett-Packard Company’s driver to select the forward compatibility fonts. The Lexmark PCL driver uses the backward compatibility mode and temporarily switches the printer to this mode. The PCL (PJL) commands to switch the default compatibility modes are: Forward ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL6 @PJL RESET Backward ESC %-12345X ESC %-12345X@PJL DEFAULT LPARM:PCL LFONTCOMPATIBILITY=PCL5 @PJL RESET ESC %-12345X Specialty PCL Fonts The following table lists the font selection commands for forward and backward compatibility mode for each of the five specialty PCL fonts. Since the font selection commands for the forward and backward compatibility modes are identical, they are listed together in the table. Table 2-22: Forward and Backward Compatibility Font Selection Commands Forward and Backward Compatibility Mode Standard PCL Emulation Font Name Spacing Style Weight Typeface 1 0 0 32774 C39 Regular 1 1 0 0 32772 C39 Wide 1 C39 Narrow 1 1 0 0 32777 OCR-A 1 0 0 0 23584 OCR-B 1 0 0 0 23590 1 This font is not implemented in the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet 4050. 2-43 PCL Selecting Symbol Sets for the Lexmark E234(n), E330, and E332n To determine if a font or typeface supports a symbol set, see the complete listing of PCL emulation fonts and symbol sets in the following tables: “Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1” on page 2-43, “Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek” on page 2-48, and “Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials” on page 2-53. Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US Courier Italic MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U Courier Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. this symbol set. 2-44 PCL Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Arial Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Letter Gothic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Letter Gothic Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Letter Gothic Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Condensed Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Condensed Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Condensed Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Garamond Antiqua ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Garamond Kursiv ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Garamond Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Garamond Kursiv Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Omega ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US Times New Roman Italic MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U Times New Roman Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. this symbol set. 2-45 PCL Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Omega Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Antique Olive ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Antique Olive Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Antique Olive Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Albertus Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Albertus Extra Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Clarendon Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Marigold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Coronet ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Narrow ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Narrow Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Narrow Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Palatino Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US CG Omega Bold MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U CG Omega Italic Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. this symbol set. 2-46 PCL Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Palatino Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Bookman Light ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Bookman Light Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Bookman Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Bookman Demi Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Avant Garde Book ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Avant Garde Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Century Schoolbook Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Century Schoolbook Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Century Schoolbook Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CourierPS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CourierPS Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CourierPS Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CourierPS Bold Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US Palatino Bold MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U Palatino Italic Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. this symbol set. 2-47 PCL Table 2-23: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 1 PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N) PC-850 Multilingual PC-858 Multilingual Euro PC-860 Portugal PC-861 Iceland PC-863 Canadian French PC-865 Nordic PC-1004 OS/2 ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal ABICOMP International Roman-8 Roman-9 Roman Extension PS Text 12U PC850 13U PC858 20U 21U 23U 25U 9J 13P 14P 8U ROMAN8 4U 0E 10J Ventura International PC-8, Code Page 437 ISOL9 9N 11U PC8DN ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) 10U PC8 Windows 98 Latin 1 ISOL1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Light ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Light Oblique ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Black ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ Helvetica Black Oblique ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ POSTNET Barcode ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Narrow ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ Wingdings ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Symbol ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ SymbolPS ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Zapf Dingbats ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ DESKTOP Desk Top VNINTL VNUS 7J 13J 14J PSTEXT 12J Ventura US Times Italic MC Text ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ PJL Value ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 Windows 3.0 Latin 1 WIN30 9U Times Roman Typeface / Symbol Set Legal LEGAL Symbol Set ID 1U 19U WINL1 Latin 1 ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. this symbol set. 2-48 PCL Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek Symbol Set ID Courier ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CG Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Univers Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Times New Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman BoldItalic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9T ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-49 PCL Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek Symbol Set ID Arial Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value 9T ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 Univers Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Antiqua ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Kursiv ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Kursiv Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Antique Olive ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Antique Olive Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-50 PCL Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek Symbol Set ID Antique Olive Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Albertus Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Albertus Extra Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Clarendon Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Marigold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Coronet ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Light ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Light Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9T ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-51 PCL Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek Symbol Set ID ITC Bookman Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value 9T ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 ITC Bookman Demi Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Book ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Bold Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-52 PCL Table 2-24: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Latin 2, Latin 5, Latin 6, Cyrillic, Greek Turkish-8 Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic) ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6) Windows 98 Cyrillic ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic PC-866 Cyrillic PC-855 Cyrillic Russian-GOST PC-8 Bulgarian Ukrainian Windows 98 Greek ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek PC-869 Greece PC-851 Greece PC-8 Latin/Greek PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G) Greek-8 8T 19L 6N 26U 9R 10N 3R 10R 12R 13R 14R 9G 12N 11G 10G 12G 14G 8G PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish) 18U PC8TK PC-Turkish (437T) PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish) ISOL5 5N 16U Windows 98 Latin 5 5T ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 PC Nova WINL5 27Q PC-8 Polish Mazovia 24Q Greek Symbol Set ID Times Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Light ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Light Oblique ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Black ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Black Oblique ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ POSTNET Barcode ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Narrow ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Wingdings ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Symbol ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ SymbolPS ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Zapf Dingbats ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ PJL Value ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9T ISOL2 PC-852 Latin 2 Cyrillic 2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Latin 6 WINL2 17U PC852 Latin 5 9E Typeface / Symbol Set Windows 98 Latin 2 Latin 2 Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-53 PCL Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O Courier ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Courier Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Times ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Times Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times New Roman BoldItalic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Arial Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-54 PCL Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O Arial Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Letter Gothic Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Univers Condensed Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Antiqua ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Kursiv ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Garamond Kursiv Halbfett ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CG Omega Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Antique Olive ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Antique Olive Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Antique Olive Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Albertus Medium ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Albertus Extra Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-55 PCL Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O Clarendon Condensed Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Marigold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Coronet ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Palatino Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Light ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Light Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Bookman Demi Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Book ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-56 PCL Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O ITC Avant Garde Demi ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Century Schoolbook Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ CourierPS Bold Oblique ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Roman ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Bold ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Times Bold Italic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Light ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Light Oblique ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Black ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Helvetica Black Oblique ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Line Printer 16 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ POSTNET Barcode ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-57 PCL Table 2-25: PCL Emulation Symbol Sets (Continued) - Specials 14L PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 579L Wingdings 19M Symbol C39 Bar Code (plus Human Readable) 209Y C39 Bar Code (plus Lower Case) 109Y C39 Bar Code (Upper Case) 1O C39 Narrow ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Regular ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ C39 Wide ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-A ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ OCR-B ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ Wingdings ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ Symbol ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ SymbolPS ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ITC Zapf Dingbats ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✘ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Indicates Typeface supports the specified Symbol Set. ✘ Indicates Typeface does not support the specified Symbol Set. 9Y 0O OCR-B 15Y OCR-A 3K POSTNET Barcode 6J PC-911 Katakana 15U MSPUBL Microsoft Publishing Pi font 8M PIFONT Math-8 5M MATH8 Symbol Set ID 6M PJL Value PSMATH PS Math Typeface / Symbol Set VNMATH Ventura Math Specials Grey-shaded cells: In the backward compatability mode, this font is not supported or this font does not support this symbol set. 2-58 PCL All fonts that support the Roman-8 (8U) symbol set also support the following 19 symbol sets. Table 2-26: ISO PCL Emulation Symbol Sets Symbol Set ID Symbol Set / Typeface 1E ISO 4: United Kingdom 0U ISO 6: ASCII 0S ISO 11: Swedish for Names 0I ISO 15: Italian 2S ISO 17: Spanish 1G ISO 21: German 0D ISO 60: Norwegian Version 1 1F ISO 69: French 2U ISO 2: IRV (International Ref Version) 0F ISO 25: French 0G ISO: HP German 0K ISO 14: JIS ASCII 2K ISO 57: Chinese 3S ISO 10: Swedish 1S ISO: HP Spanish 6S ISO 85: Spanish 4S ISO 16: Portuguese 5S ISO 84: Portuguese 1D ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2 2-59 PCL Command Structure This section introduces the different types of PCL emulation commands and their structure, or syntax. It also demonstrates how you can link commands to abbreviate them. Control Codes Control Codes are single-character instructions. Table 2-27: Control Codes Code Dec Hex Function Result BS 8 08 Backspace Moves the cursor toward the left margin one horizontal space equal to the last printed character HT 9 09 Horizontal Tab Moves the cursor to the next defined tab stop LF 10 0A Line Feed Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position on the following line as determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or Set Line Spacing command FF 12 0C Form Feed Advances the cursor to the same horizontal position at the top margin of the next page CR 13 0D Carriage Return Moves the cursor to the left margin SP 32 20 Space Moves the cursor to the right one column SI 15 0F Primary Font Selects the primary font SO 14 0E Secondary Font Selects the secondary font Commands PCL commands are multibyte strings (also known as “escape sequences”) that begin with the Escape control code (ESC, ←, decimal 27, or hexadecimal 1B). The ESC control code notifies the printer that the characters that follow are to be interpreted as part of a command and are not control codes or data to be printed. 2-60 PCL Command Structure Most PCL emulation commands have the following structure: ESC & a # C Spaces have been added to this example for readability. The command parameter variables are indicated by a number sign (#). Table 2-28: Description of Command Structure Element Description ESC Decimal 27 or hex 1B & Parameterized character from American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) table (range 33 to 47 decimal) a Group character from ASCII table (range 96 to 126 decimal) that specifies a group type of control # Decimal character string value within specified numeric ranges; may be preceded by a + or – sign and contain a decimal point C Termination character from ASCII table (range 64 to 94 decimal) Command Parameters A command parameter sets the value for a command. This value stays constant until either a different value resets the command or a command resets the printer to the default values. For example, after the printer receives a command that selects a right margin beginning at column 63, the right margin of each printed page begins at column 63. That margin stays constant until a right margin command with a different value resets it or until the printer is reset. Parameters for each command are listed in the command tables beginning on page 2-62. Use the Symbol Set Tables to determine the decimal or hexadecimal value for each parameter. To determine a decimal or hex value, first locate the value of the parameter you require in the Symbol Set Table. The decimal value is the value shown in the bottom of the cell or box with that parameter. To find a hex value, go straight up the grid from the desired parameter and read the value in the top heading. This is the first character of the hex value. Next, go straight across the grid to the left of the parameter and read the value in the left column heading. This is the second character of the hex value. For example, ESC (←) is coded 1B in Hex and 27 in decimal. (Any one of the three values ←, 1B, or 27 might be used in your application. Read your documentation to determine which to use.) The example on the following page sets the pitch of the primary font to 16.66 characters per inch. 2-61 PCL Example: ESC (s16.66H • Decimal: 27 40 115 49 54 46 54 54 72 • Hex: 1B 28 73 31 36 2E 36 36 48 Use the plus symbol (+) or the minus symbol (–) to select a position relative to the current cursor position. For example: ESC &a6C &a+6C ESC &a-6C ESC Move to horizontal cursor position, column six Move six columns to the right of the current position Move six columns to the left of the current position Linking Commands You can combine PCL emulation commands by linking them if the first 3 bytes of the commands are identical. The combined, short form sends the first 3 bytes only once in the string. To combine commands: • Use the first 3 bytes (characters) of the command only once at the start of the command string. • • Make the last letter of each command in the string lowercase. Capitalize the last letter of the string. For example, notice that the first 3 bytes of these two commands are the same: ESC (s10H (s4099T ESC Select 10 characters per inch Select Courier typeface To combine these two commands, use this form: ESC (s10h4099T which is 3 bytes shorter than the long form: ESC (s10HESC(s4099T You can combine more than two commands; for example, you can add Select Stroke Weight Bold (ESC(s3B) to the previous two commands: ESC (s10h3b4099T or in the long form: ESC (s10HESC(s3BESC(s4099T 2-62 PCL PCL Emulation Commands See the following tables for a listing of the commands grouped by function. To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table A-1: PCL Emulation Commands” on page A-1. PCL Emulation Commands by Function Table 2-29: Job Control Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Printer Reset E • Prints any partial pages. • Resets printer environment to defaults. • Deletes all temporary downloaded resources. ESC&d#A 0 = Collation off Number of Collated Copies Turns collation of pages off or sets the number of collated copies. 1 ... 999 (number of Copies) &l#X Number of Copies # = number of Copies (1 to 32767) Affects the page currently in process and subsequent pages. ESC Default = 1 ESC &l#S 0 Single-Sided (Default) 1 Duplex Long-Edge Binding 2 Duplex Short-Edge Binding 100 Manual Duplex First Sides 101 Manual Duplex Second Sides Simplex/Duplex Print Long-edge or short-edge binding refers to the side of the physical page where binding occurs. &l#U Long-Edge Offset Registration # = number of Decipoints Also known as Left Offset. Range = -32767 to 32767 Adjusts placement of logical page along the width of the physical page. ESC (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0 &l#Z Short-Edge Offset Registration # = number of Decipoints Also known as Top Offset. Range = -32767 to 32767 Adjusts placement of logical page along the length of the physical page. ESC (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0 2-63 PCL Table 2-29: Job Control (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&u#D Unit of Measure Range = (96, 100, 120, 144, 150, 160, 180, 200, 225, 240, 288, 300, 360, 400, 450, 480, 600, 720, 800, 900, 1200, 1440, 1800, 2400, 3600, 7200) Default = 300 units per inch Sets the size for the PCL Unit (units per inch). The Unit of Measure defines the unit used in the following commands: • • • • Horizontal Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#X) Vertical Cursor Position by PCL Unit (ESC*p#Y) Horizontal Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#A) Vertical Rectangle Size by PCL Unit (ESC*c#B) The Unit of Measure also affects the rounding of character escapements and the Horizontal Motion Index. Note: This command does not affect the interpretation of binary raster data for bitmapped fonts, raster graphics, or user defined fill patterns. ESC %–12345X Universal Exit Language (UEL) / Start of PJL This command terminates the current printer language and allows switching into PJL. For more information, see “UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command” on page 3-2. 2-64 PCL Table 2-30: Page Control Command / Parameters ESC &l#A Set Page Size Paper 1 2 3 4, 10 6, 11 13, 25 15 26 27 12, 45 46 101 Executive Letter Legal Folio Ledger (11 x 17) A5 Paper Statement A4 Paper A3 Paper B5 Paper B4 Paper Custom Paper/Universal Envelopes 80 81 89 90 91 99, 100 600 ESC ESC Monarch 7 3/4 Commercial 10 Commercial 9 DL C5 B5 Envelope Other Envelope &l#H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 21 62 Function / Result Selects the physical size of the paper, which also determines the logical page dimensions. See the tables beginning on page 2-4 for the paper and envelope dimensions your printer supports. If the requested page size is not in the requested source or if no source is requested, sources are checked for the requested size in the following order: multipurpose feeder, tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, tray 5, and envelope feeder. Notes: • When the printer receives the page size command, any partially formatted pages are printed, and the cursor position and margins are reset. • Duplex printing is not supported on any envelope. • The size loaded in the active source is checked to see if it matches the requested size. If the multipurpose feeder is configured as Cassette or Manual, the same applies; however, if the multipurpose feeder is configured as First and media is loaded in the multipurpose feeder, then, regardless of media size, it is the source used until it is empty. Paper Source Active Source or Eject Page Tray 1 (Default) Manual Paper Feed Manual Envelope Feed Tray 2 Tray 3 Optional Envelope Feeder Auto Select Multipurpose Feeder Tray 4 Tray 5 Optional Paper Source Selects the paper feed source. Note: If the paper source is changed for the back of a duplexed page, a blank back page prints, the paper source changes, and the information for the back side of the page is printed on the front side of a page sent from the new paper source. &f#G Set Universal Width # = number of Decipoints Sets the width of the Universal size in decipoints. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) ESC&f#F # = number of Decipoints (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Set Universal Height Sets the height of the Universal size in decipoints. 2-65 PCL Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&f#O Set Universal Feed Direction 0 1 ESC Short-edge Long-edge Sets the feed direction of Universal size. Feed direction means which side of the print media, either the short edge or the long edge, feeds first through the printer first. &f#W [custom name] Set Universal Custom Name # = number of bytes in the custom name Sets the user-specified custom name for the Universal paper size being used. l#O ESC& 0 1 2 3 ESC Portrait (Default) Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Select Orientation Specifies the position of the logical page with respect to the physical page. Note: Resets margins, number of printable lines per page, and cursor position. &a#P Print Direction # = Degrees (0, 90, 180, 270) Rotates coordinate system counter-clockwise in 90° increments with respect to current orientation. Default = 0 Note: Margins are not rotated or cleared. ESC &c#T 0 -1 ESC Character Text Path Direction Horizontal Printing Vertical Rotated Printing Vertically rotates text for use in vertical writing, such as printing Japanese text. &a#L Set Left Margin # = Column Sets left margin to left edge of the designated column. Default = 0 Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI). ESC &a#M Set Right Margin # = Column Sets right margin to right edge of the designated column. Default = Logical Page Width Note: The column width is defined by the space character of the active font and the HMI. ESC 9 Clear Horizontal Margins Clears left and right margins. ESC &l#E # = number of Lines Default = 3 (1/2 inch) Set Top Margin Sets the number of lines between the top of the physical page and first line of print. Line height is determined by the current Vertical Motion Index (VMI) and/or line spacing value. Note: Setting a top margin of 0 results in the first line of text falling outside of the printable area. ESC &l1T Job Separation This command is parsed and ignored. 2-66 PCL Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued) Command / Parameters l#F ESC& Function / Result Set Text Length # = number of Lines Default = 60 or 64 (Country specific) Sets the bottom margin length in lines, measured from the first line of the page. Text Length equals Logical Page Length –1 inch (–1/2 inch for top and –1/2 inch for bottom). ESC &l#G 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ESC &l#L 0 1 ESC Auto Select (uses the active bin) Standard Bin Bin 1 or Rear Bin Bin 1 or Rear Bin Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 Set Output Bin Sets the exit path to direct paper to one of the output bins. Skip Perforation Off On (Default) Perforation area includes the area from the bottom margin of the current page to the top margin of the next page. When skipping perforations, a line feed past the bottom margin ejects a page and places the cursor at the top margin of the next page. &k#H Set Horizontal Motion Index (HMI) # = number of 1/120 inch increments Sets the width of all characters for fixed-space fonts. Sets only the width of the space for proportional spaced fonts. (Valid to 4 decimal places) l#C ESC& # = number of 1/48 inch increments (Valid to 4 decimal places) Default = 8 Set Vertical Motion Index (VMI) Sets Vertical Motion Index in 1/48 inch increments. The VMI determines the vertical distance between lines. Notes: • For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the Lines Per Page menu item. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. • Use of this command alters any previous Set Line Spacing command settings. 2-67 PCL Table 2-30: Page Control (Continued) Command / Parameters l#D ESC& 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 48 Set Line Spacing (Alternative Method) 1 line/inch 2 lines/inch 3 lines/inch 4 lines/inch 6 lines/inch (Default) 8 lines/inch 12 lines/inch 16 lines/inch 24 lines/inch 48 lines/inch ESC&a#G 0 1 2 Specifies VMI in lines per inch. Notes: • For some printers, you can change the default VMI from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional by using the Lines Per Page menu item. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. • Unsupported values are ignored. • Use of this command alters any earlier VMI setting. Duplex Page Side Selection Next Side Front Side Back Side l#P ESC& Specifies which physical page side to print next when duplex printing. Note: When the duplex option is not installed, this command causes a conditional page eject. Set Page Length # = number from 0 to 14 0 = default page length is used (1 to 14 new page length is set) ESC&k#W 5 6 Function / Result Sets the logical page length in number of lines. Notes: • This command is sent at the beginning of a page in a print job and prior to any printable data. • When the command is sent, the current page is closed and printed. • Unsupported values are ignored. Text Scale Mode Turn Text Scale Mode OFF Turn Text Scale Mode ON Allows 66 lines of text at six lines per inch to print on an effective page length of 10 1/2 inches. Notes: • Unsupported values are ignored. • The command is ignored when the printer is in landscape mode. 2-68 PCL Table 2-31: Alphanumeric ID Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC &n#W [operation] [string] Alphanumeric ID # = number of data bytes that make up the operation and string Selects the media type using a character string. The string ID is case sensitive and may be up to 511 bytes long. The string ID specifies the media type requested. Operation operation = 100 or 1 byte = 0x64 or 'd' ascii For example: 100 Media Select String string = See Alphanumeric String list at right Media Type Alphanumeric String Plain Paper Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Pre-printed Colored Paper Envelope Custom Type 1 Custom Type 2 Custom Type 3 Custom Type 4 Custom Type 5 Custom Type 6 Plain Bond Transparency Card Stock Labels Letterhead Preprinted Color Envelope Custom Type 1 or User Type 1 Custom Type 2 or User Type 2 Custom Type 3 or User Type 3 Custom Type 4 or User Type 4 Custom Type 5 or User Type 5 Custom Type 6 or User Type 6 For example, the following shows the command and parameters used to select bond paper: ESC&n5WdBond To select letterhead paper: ESC&n11WdLetterhead Table 2-32: Cursor Positioning Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC &a#C Horizontal Cursor Position (in Columns) # = number of Columns1 Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis. Note: The column width is determined by the space character width of the active font or the Horizontal Motion Index (HMI), if set. ESC &a#H Horizontal Cursor Position (in Decipoints) # = number of Decipoints1 Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) ESC *p#X # = number of PCL Horizontal Cursor Position (in PCL Units) Units1 Moves the cursor to a new position along the horizontal axis. Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command. 1 Parameter preceded by + or – sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin. 2-69 PCL Table 2-32: Cursor Positioning (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&a#R Vertical Cursor Position (in Rows) # = number of Rows 1 Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis. Note: Row height is determined by either the Vertical Motion Index (VMI) or the Set Line Spacing Command. ESC&a#V Vertical Cursor Position (in Decipoints) 1 # = number of Decipoints Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) ESC *p#Y Vertical Cursor Position (in PCL Units) # = number of PCL Units 1 Moves the cursor to a new position along the vertical axis. Note: PCL units are set by the Unit-of-Measure Command. ESC = Half Line-Feed Moves the cursor down 1/2 line (1/2 of the current VMI). ESC &k#G 0 1 2 3 ESC CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF (Default) CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF CR=CR, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF, FF=CR+FF &f#S 0 1 1 Set Line Termination Controls how the printer responds to the Carriage Return (CR), Line Feed (LF), and Form Feed (FF) control codes. Push / Pop Cursor Position Push Pop Sets up a cursor position stack for storing and recalling various cursor positions. The stack can store up to 20 cursor positions. Parameter preceded by + or – sign denotes a relative cursor move from the current cursor position. Parameter without a sign denotes an absolute cursor move from the top left margin. 2-70 PCL Note: For the commands listed in Table 2-33, font selection is based on all parameters set following the best fit selection rules. Table 2-33: Font Selection Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Select Symbol Set (# (primary) ESC)# (secondary) # = symbol set ID Default = 10U (PC-8) or 12U (PC-850), [Country specific] ESC (s#P (primary) ESC)s#P 0 1 ESC (secondary) Note: The line-draw characters are contained in the symbol set ID 10U, PC-8. The non-U.S. characters are contained in symbol set ID 12U, PC-850. Select Spacing Selects a font with proportional or fixed spacing. Fixed (Default) Proportional (s#H (primary) ESC)s#H See “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422” on page 2-9, or “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n)” on page 2-19 for more information. (secondary) # = characters per inch Default = 10 Select Pitch Selects the number of characters per inch (cpi) for a fixed-space bitmapped or monospaced scalable font. Valid to 2 decimal places. Note: Pitch is not needed for proportional spaced fonts. ESC (s#V (primary) Height (Select Point Size) ESC )s#V (secondary) Sets the font height in points. Valid to 2 decimal places. # = height in points (.25 to 999.75) Note: Point size is not needed for monospaced fonts. For fonts larger than 12 points, it may be necessary to change the line spacing. Default = 12 ESC(s#S ESC (primary) )s#S (secondary) 0 1 4 5 8 24 32 64 128 160 Upright (Default) Italic Condensed Condensed Italic Compressed Expanded Outline Inline Shadowed Outline Shadowed Select Style Identifies the physical traits of a character and the composition of the font symbols. Note: You can only use this command to select fonts currently available in the printer. It cannot alter the appearance of the available fonts. 2-71 PCL Table 2-33: Font Selection (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC(s#B Select Stroke Weight ESC ESC (primary) )s#B (secondary) Selects a font with a particular thickness. -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: This command will not alter the stroke weight of an available font. Ultra Thin Extra Thin Thin Extra Light Light Demi Light Semi Light Medium (Default) Semi Bold Demi Bold Bold Extra Bold Black Extra Black Ultra Black (s#T (primary) ESC)s#T (secondary) # Typeface identifier (0 - 65535) Note: For a list of typeface numbers, see Table 2-4 on page 2-10 and Table 2-9 on page 2-20. Select Typeface Selects the best fit font design. To obtain the typeface values for downloaded fonts, print the font list from the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. On the printout, the typeface number is the last number on the font selection command example line. The example line is below the name of the font. In the following example, the typeface number is underlined: RO Courier <>(< >< >(s0p< >h0s0b4099T ESC(#X ESC (primary) )#X (secondary) Select Font by Font ID Selects the font by the identification number. # = Font ID (0 - 32767) ESC (3@ (primary) Select Default Font ESC )3@ (secondary) Sets all font selection characteristics to the Default Font. ESC &p#X[data] Transparent Print Data # = number of data of bytes to print as text Prints the next number of bytes as text. ESC &d#D 0,1 2 3 4 ESC&d@ Select Underline Type (Enable) Fixed Fixed - double Floating Floating - double Notes: • Fixed underline is drawn 5 pels below cursor position. • Floating underline position is determined by all the positions of the characters with descenders in the fonts that are to be underlined. • Underline thickness is 1/100 inch. Underline - Disable 2-72 PCL Table 2-33: Font Selection (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&t#P Text Parsing Method 0, 1 21 31 38 1008 ESC 1 byte characters Communicates to the PCL parser whether character codes are 1 or 2 byte characters interpreted as 1-byte or 2-byte character codes. 1 or 2 byte characters 1 or 2 byte characters 1, 2, or 3 byte characters (UTF-8) &k#S 0 2 4 Select Primary and Secondary Pitch 10.00 cpi 16.66 cpi 12.00 cpi Selects the pitch for the primary and secondary font. Table 2-34: User-Defined Symbol Set Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC *c#R Symbol Set ID Code # = Symbol Set ID (0 - 32767) Sets the symbol set identification for the symbol set downloaded. Default = 0 ESC(f#W[data] # = number of data bytes ESC*c#S 0 1 2 4 5 Define Symbol Set Contains the data for the user-defined symbol sets. Symbol Set Control Delete all (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary Delete current (ID) Make current temporary Make current permanent Manages user-defined symbol sets. 2-73 PCL Table 2-35: Font Creation Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC *c#D Set Font ID # = Font ID # (0 - 32767) Sets the identification number for the font being downloaded. Default = 0 ESC )s#W[data] Load Font Header # = number of data bytes Downloads soft font header information. Note: Set Font ID before using this command. ESC*c#F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Caution: Font Control Delete all (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary Delete previous font ID Delete previous specified character Make previous font ID temporary Make previous font ID permanent Copy current font ESC*c#E Set Character Code # = Code Point (0 - 65536) Default = 0 ESC Manages soft fonts. Sets the decimal code point associated with the next character downloaded or deleted. (s#W[data] Load Character # = number of data bytes Downloads character descriptor and data to the current character code. Table 2-36: Macros Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&f#Y Set Macro ID # = Macro ID (0 - 32767) Sets the ID for the macro you have created on flash or disk. Default = 0 ESC &f#X 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Macro Control Start definition End definition Execute macro (previous macro ID) Call macro (previous macro ID) Enable overlay (previous macro ID) Disable overlay Delete all macros Delete all temporary macros Delete current macro ID Make last ID temporary Make last ID permanent Manages use of macros. Notes: • GL/2 commands are supported inside macros. • Only call and execute macro commands are allowed within a macro. • A macro may call or execute another macro. This is called nesting. A maximum of two nesting levels are allowed, for a total of three levels. See “Macros” on page 2-95 for additional information. 2-74 PCL Table 2-37: Print Model Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Area Fill ID *c#G Gray Scale Fills 0 1-2 3-10 11-20 21-35 36-55 56-80 81-99 100 Selects pattern used to fill a rectangular area. White (default) 2% gray 10% gray 15% gray 30% gray 45% gray 70% gray 90% gray 100% gray (Black) Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID. Cross-Hatch Fills 1 2 3 4 5 6 Horizontal line Vertical line Diagonal line Diagonal line Square grid Diagonal grid User-Defined Patterns # = User-Defined Pattern ID ESC *v#N 0 1 ESC Source Transparency Mode Transparent (Default) Opaque *v#O 0 1 Pattern Transparency Mode Transparent (Default) Opaque l#O ESC* Default = 252 *l#R 0 1 Affects copying of white pixels from the pattern onto the destination image. Logical Operation # = logical operation, value (0 to 255) ESC Affects copying of white pixels from the source onto the destination image. Defines boolean operations to be performed on data already printed and data about to be printed. Pixel Placement Grid Intersection (Default) Grid Centered Determines how pixels are placed for a rectangular area fill and GL/2 objects. Pixel Placement does not affect text or raster images. ESC *v#T 0 1 2 3 4 9 Select Current Pattern Solid Black (Default) Solid White Gray Shading Pattern Cross-Hatch Pattern User Defined Pattern True gray Level Fill Selects pattern used when printing text and raster images. 2-75 PCL Table 2-38: User-Defined Pattern Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC *c#W[data] User-Defined Pattern # = number of data bytes Downloads binary pattern data. ESC *p#R 0 1 Set Pattern Reference Point Rotate with print (Default) Fixed Sets pattern reference point to the current cursor position for userdefined patterns. Note: Default pattern reference point is the upper left corner of logical page. ESC*c#Q 0 1 2 4 5 Caution: Pattern Control Delete all patterns (temporary and permanent) Delete all temporary patterns Delete pattern (last ID specified) Make pattern of last ID # temporary Make pattern of last ID # permanent Manages use of user-defined patterns. Note: Use Area Fill ID command (ESC*c#G) to set ID. Table 2-39: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC *c#H Horizontal Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) # = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767) Specifies the rectangle width in decipoints. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places ESC*c#A Horizontal Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) # = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767) Specifies the rectangle width in PCL units. Default = 0 Note: Size of PCL Units is set by Unit-of-Measure command. ESC *c#V Vertical Rectangle Size (in Decipoints) # = Number of Decipoints (0 - 32767) Specifies the rectangle height in decipoints. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) Default = 0, valid to 4 decimal places ESC*c#B Vertical Rectangle Size (in PCL Units) # = Number of PCL Units (0 - 32767) Specifies the rectangle height in PCL units. Default = 0 Note: Size of PCL Units is set by Unit-of-Measure command. 2-76 PCL Table 2-39: Rectangular Area Fill Graphics (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC*c#G Area Fill ID Gray Scale Fills Selects pattern used to fill rectangle area. 0 1-2 3-10 11-20 21-35 36-55 56-80 81-99 100 White (default) 2% Gray 10% Gray 15% Gray 30% Gray 45% Gray 70% Gray 90% Gray 100% Gray (Black) Note: This command is also used to set the user-defined pattern ID. Cross-Hatch Fills 1 2 3 4 5 6 Horizontal Line Vertical Line Diagonal Line Diagonal Line Square Grid Diagonal Grid User-Defined Patterns # = User-Defined Pattern ID ESC *c#P 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 Fill Rectangular Area Black Fill (Default) White Fill Gray Fill Pre-Defined Cross-Hatch Pattern Fill User-Defined Pattern Current Pattern Fill True gray Level Fill Fills a rectangular area defined by Horizontal and Vertical Rectangle Sizes with selected pattern. 2-77 PCL Table 2-40: Raster Graphics Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Raster Resolution *t#R 75 100 150 200 300 600 1200 ESC 75 dpi 100 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi *r#F Raster Graphics Presentation 0 3 Rotate with print Fixed (Default) ESC*r#S # = Number of Input Pixels ESC*r#A ESC ESC Sets width of clip window for raster graphics. Raster Height (Source) # = Number of Raster Lines 3 Sets the Raster Image Orientation in relation to the logical page. Raster Width (Source) ESC*r#T 0 1 2 Note: 200 dpi is only supported when the printer is operating in 600 dpi or 1200 dpi mode. Sets height of clip window for raster graphics. Start Raster Graphics Left Graphics Margin at 0 (Default) Current Cursor Position At logical left page limit with scaling On At current cursor position with scaling On Sets the left margin for raster graphics. *b#V[data] Transfer Raster Data by Plane # = Number of Data Bytes This command is used when the raster data is encoded by plane as specified by the Simple Color command or the Configure Image Data command. The command sends each plane in the row except the last. *b#Y Y Offset # = Number of Raster Lines Moves cursor position down by the specified number of raster lines. 2-78 PCL Table 2-40: Raster Graphics (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC*b#M Set Raster Compression Mode 0 1 2 3 5 9 999 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 Uncoded (Default) Run-Length Encoded Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) byte Delta Row Adaptive Compression Replacement Delta Row Zlib Group 4 Group 3 one dimensional Group 3 two dimensional K=2 Group 3 two dimensional K=4 TIFF word (16 bit) TIFF double-word (32 bit) Adaptive compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word) ESC*b#W[data] # = Number of Data Bytes Identifies the compression mode the host uses to transfer RIG data. For instance, this command can be run-length encoding or TIFF encoding. Note: For further information, see “Raster Compression Mode” on page 2-88 and “Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression” on page 2-93. Transfer Raster Data by Row/Block Transfers RIG data. Note: After each command, the cursor position is moved to the beginning of the next raster row. ESC*rB End Raster Graphics (Version B) Signals end of raster graphics transfer. If a Raster Height is specified, the cursor is moved to the first raster row past the Raster Height. ESC *rC End Raster Graphics (Version C) Same as Version B, but: • Resets compression mode to uncoded. • Sets left graphics margin to 0. ESC *t#H Raster Width (Destination) Sets the width of the destination raster. 2-79 Table 2-40: Raster Graphics (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC*t#V Raster Height (Destination) Sets the height of the destination raster. ESC*g#W[data] Set Raster Configuration Sets the configuration of the destination raster. # - 8 (K-only) or 26 (KCMY) Data Byte 0 - 0x02 (constant) Byte 1 - number of colors 0x01 - K only 0x04 - CMYK Byte 2,3 - X res for K plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 4,5 - Y res for K plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 6,7 - K plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 8,9 - X res for C plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 10,11 - Y res for C plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 12,13 - C plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 14,15 - X res for M plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 16,17 - Y res for M plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 18,19 - M plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) Byte 20,21 - X res for Y plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 22,23 - Y res for Y plane 0x012C (300) or 0x0258 (600) Byte 24,25 - Y plane intensity levels 0x02 (1 bit/plane) or 0x04 (2 bits/plane) PCL 2-80 PCL Table 2-41: Color Extensions Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Monochrome Print Mode &b#M 0 1 ESC Print in mixed render algorithm Changes each color value to its gray scale equivalent. mode Print using gray scale equivalent &p#C 0 1 2 6 Palette Control Delete all palettes except those in stack (active palette is deleted) Delete all palettes in stack (active palette not affected) Delete palette specified by Palette Control ID Copy active palette to ID specified by Palette Control ID ESC&p#I 0 to 32767 Palette Control ID Palette ID number ESC&p#S 0 to 32767 Palette ID number l#W[data] 770, Data Resets or initializes the color lookup tables for each primary color to the unity curve Data for color lookup table Data size and data of byte-aligned binary data that specifies a matrix or matrices for the primary colors *o#W[data] Specifies lightness, saturation, and image scaling ESC*p#P Indicates the lightness, saturation, and scaling algorithm to be applied to a job. Push/Pop Palette Push (Save) Palette Pop (Restore) Palette *r#U -4 -3 1 3 Downloads a device dependent user-defined dither matrix. Driver Configuration Command 1 to 32767, Data ESC Enables the color lookup tables and specifies the table to use. Download Dither Matrix 7 to 32767, Data 0 1 Selects a new active palette by indicating the ID number. Color Lookup Tables ESC*m#W[data] ESC Indicates the ID number used by the Palette Control command. Select Palette ESC* 0 Provides palette management. Saves (push) the current palette and then restores (pop) it from the palette stack. Simple Color 4 planes, device KCMY palette 3 planes, device CMY palette Single plane, K (black) palette 3 planes, device RGB palette Creates a fixed-size palette. The color specification of the palette cannot be modified. 2-81 PCL Table 2-41: Color Extensions (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC*t#I Gamma Correction 0 0.0 to 4.0 ESC Gamma Correction Off Gamma Number *t#J Improves the perceptual correctness of color data sent from the monitor to any other non-linear device by adjusting the brightness and darkness. Render Algorithm Selects the algorithm used for dithering images and fills. ESC *v#A Color Component One -32767.0 to 32767.0 Indicates the first primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. ESC*v#B ESC ESC -32767.0 to 32767.0 Indicates the second primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. *v#C Color Component Three -32767.0 to 32767.0 Indicates the third primary color specified by the Assign Color Index command. *v#I Assign Color Index # = Palette Index 0 to 2n – 1 = Palette Index Designates the three current color components to the specified palette index number. n represents the number of bits per index. ESC*v#S ESC Color Component Two Foreground Color # = Palette Index 0 to 2n – 1 = Palette Index Sets the foreground color to the specified index in the current palette. n represents the current palette size. *v#W[data] Configure Image Data Creates programmable palettes. ESC *i#W[data] Viewing Illuminant 8, Data Designates the relative white point used in determining a viewing illuminant condition. 2-82 PCL Table 2-42: Status Readback Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC Set Status Readback Location Type *s#T 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 200 Invalid location (Default) Use currently selected location All locations Internal (resident) Downloaded entity Cartridge User-installable flash Disk ESC*s#U 0 1 2 4 ESC The 5 value for Cartridge may be specified, but since your printer does not support font cards or cartridges, the command is ignored. The 7 value for User-installable flash is only valid when flash memory is installed. The 200 value is only valid when a hard disk is installed. Set Status Readback Location Unit All If download, temporary; otherwise, highest priority If download, permanent; otherwise, next higher priority ESC*s#I 0 1 2 3 Sets the status location type to the specified value. Sets the status location unit to the specified value. The location unit is used along with the location type to identify a location for the Inquire Status Readback Entity command. Note: The unit value is interpreted differently, depending on the location type specified. Inquire Status Readback Entity Font Macro User-defined pattern Symbol set (for unbound scalable fonts) Font extended *s1M Returns the requested information set by Set Status Readback Location Type and Set Status Readback Location Unit. Free Space Returns the total available memory and the largest available block of memory. ESC&r#F 0 1 ESC Flush All Pages Flush all complete pages Flush all pages Holds print jobs in the print buffer until the current job finishes printing. *s#X Echo -32767 to 32767 Returns # back to host computer. Default = 0 2-83 PCL Table 2-43: Picture Frame Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC *c#X Picture Frame Horizontal Size (in Decipoints) # of Decipoints: 0 to 32767 Specifies the horizontal dimension of the picture frame used when printing a GL/2 plot. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) ESC *c#Y Picture Frame Vertical Size (in Decipoints) # of Decipoints: 0 to 32767 Specifies the vertical dimension of the picture frame used when printing a GL/2 plot. (1 Decipoint = 1/720 inch) ESC*c0T 0 ESC Set Picture Frame Anchor Point Set Anchor Point to Cursor Position Sets the position of the picture frame anchor point to the cursor position. The picture frame anchor point defines the location of the upper left corner of the picture frame. *c#K GL/2 Horizontal Plot Size Size in inches: 0 to 32767 Specifies the horizontal scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame. ESC*c#L GL/2 Vertical Plot Size Size in inches: 0 to 32767 ESC %#B 0 1 ESC Enter GL/2 Language Use Previous GL/2 Pen Position Use Current PCL Cursor Position %#A 0 1 Specifies the vertical scaling factor used when importing an image into the picture frame. Exits PCL emulation and uses GL/2 commands to print. Enter PCL Emulation Use Previous PCL Cursor Position Use Current GL/2 Pen Position Exits GL/2 mode and uses PCL emulation commands to print. Table 2-44: Miscellaneous Commands Command / Parameters Function / Result ESC&s#C End-Of-Line Text Wrap 0 1 ESC Y Enable Disable (Default) Enabling End-Of-Line Text Wrap moves portions of lines that extend into the unprintable area to the next line. Disabling drops the portion extending into the unprintable area. Display Functions On Prints all control codes and escape sequences rather than executing them. Notes: • To prevent characters from falling outside the right margin (and not printing), enable End-Of-Line Text Wrap (ESC&s0C). • To see the control characters and other blank codepoints in symbol set Roman8 (8U), set the symbol set to PC-8 (10U). 2-84 PCL Table 2-44: Miscellaneous Commands (Continued) Command / Parameters Function / Result ESCZ Display Functions Off Turns off Display Functions; resumes normal command processing. ESCz Print Test Page Causes a test page to print. ESC*o#M(b) -1 0 1 ESC Print Quality Ink Saver Normal Best Selects the print quality setting for the page. &l#M(b) 0 1 2 3 4 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Paper Type Plain Paper Bond Coated Paper Glossy Paper Transparency Photo Paper Card Stock Labels Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Iron On Selects the paper type setting for the page. GL/2 Commands Note: GL/2 is not a stand-alone plotter emulation. It can only be entered from within PCL emulation and cannot be used with software without a unique printer driver written explicitly for GL/2. The following tables list the GL/2 commands by group. To determine which GL/2 commands your printer supports, see “Table A-2: GL/2 Commands” on page A-6. Table 2-45: Configuration Group Command / Parameter Command Name CO "text" Comment DF; Default Values IN (n); Initialize IP (XP1, YP1(, XP2, YP2)); Input P1 and P2 2-85 PCL Table 2-45: Configuration Group (Continued) Command / Parameter Command Name IR (XP1, YP1(, XP2, YP2)); Input Relative P1 and P2 IW (X1, Y1, X2, Y2); Input Window MC (mode(, opcode)); Logical Operation PP (mode); Pixel Placement RO (angle); Rotate Coordinate System SC (Xmin, Xmax, Ymin, Ymax(, type(, left, bottom))); Scale Table 2-46: Vector Group Command / Parameter Command Name AA Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); Arc Absolute AR Xcenter, Ycenter, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); Arc Relative AT Xinter, Yinter, Xend, Yend(, chord_angle); Absolute Arc Three Point BR X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...); Bezier Relative BZ X1, Y1, X2, Y2, X3, Y3(,...); Bezier Absolute CI radius(, chord_angle); Circle PA (X, Y(,...)); Plot Absolute PD (X, Y(,...)); Pen Down PE (flag(value) | coordinates (...)); Polyline Encoded PR (X, Y(,...)); Plot Relative PU (X, Y(,...)); Pen Up RT Xincr inter, Yincr inter, Xincr end, Yincr end(, chord_angle); Arc Relative Three Point WU (type); Pen Width Units Table 2-47: Polygon Group Command / Parameter Command Name EA X, Y; Edge Rectangle Absolute EP; Edge Polygon ER X, Y; Edge Rectangle Relative EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); Edge Wedge FP (0); Fill Polygon, Odd/Even FP 1; Fill Polygon, Non-Zero Winding PM (mode); Polygon Mode 2-86 PCL Table 2-47: Polygon Group (Continued) Command / Parameter Command Name RA X, Y; Fill Rectangle Absolute RR X, Y; Fill Rectangle Relative WG radius, start_angle, sweep_angle(, chord_angle); Fill Wedge Table 2-48: Character Group Command / Parameter Command Name AD (kind, value(,...)); Define Alternate Font CF (mode(, pen)); Character Fill CP (spaces, lines); Character Plot DI (run, rise); Absolute Direction DR (run, rise); Relative Direction DT (label_terminator(, mode)); Define Label Terminator DV (path(, line)); Define Variable Text Path ES (width(, height)); Extra Space FI font_ID; Primary Font FN font_ID; Secondary Font LB char...char label_terminator; Label LM (mode,[row number]) Label Mode LO (position); Label Origin LO 21; Uses PCL Label Origin SA; Select Alternate Font SB (mode); Scalable or Bitmapped Fonts SD (kind, value(,...)); Define Standard Font SI (width, height); Absolute Character Size SL (tangent); Character Slant SR (width, height); Relative Character Size SS; Select Standard Font TD (mode); Transparent Data 2-87 Table 2-49: Line and Fill Attributes Group Command / Parameter Command Name AC (X, Y); Anchor Corner CR (red black ref, red white ref, green black ref, green white ref, blue black ref, blue white ref); Color Range FT (fill_type(, option1(, option2)); Fill Type FT22, (PCL User-Defined Pattern ID); Fill Type FT 9, level; Fill Type LA (kind, value(,...));. Line Attributes LT (pattern_number(, pattern_length(, mode))); Line Type NP (number); Number of Pens PC (pen (, red, green, blue)); Pen Color PW (width(, pen)); Pen Width RF (index(, width, height(, pen, ...))); Define Raster Fill SM (character); Symbol Mode SP (pen); Select Pen SV (screen_type(, option1(, option2))); Screened Vectors SV (9, level,) Screened Vectors TM (width, height(, number...)); Threshold Matrix TR (mode); Transparency Mode UL (index(, gap,...gap)); User Defined Line WU (type); Pen Width Units PCL 2-88 PCL Raster Image Graphics These commands utilize the raster area. Before sending data, set the presentation mode, the resolution, the compression mode, the raster height and width, and start raster graphics. These parameters are in effect until you overwrite them with a different command or there is a printer reset. To ensure that the printed image appears in the expected area, set width and height parameters. Raster Compression Mode The Raster Compression Mode command determines how raster data is coded. It affects the amount of code required to create an image, and the efficiency of image printing. Syntax: ESC *b#M Parameters: 0 Uncoded (default) 1 Run-Length Encoded 2 Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) Byte 3 Delta Row 5 Adaptive Compression 9 Replacement Delta Row 999 Zlib 1002 Group 4 1003 Group 3 one dimensional 1004 Group 3 two dimensional K=2 1005 Group 3 two dimensional K=4 1006 TIFF word (16 bit) 1007 TIFF double-word (32 bit) 1008 Adaptive Compression (includes TIFF word and TIFF double-word) 2-89 PCL Descriptions and examples of the different parameters appear on the following pages. Each example draws the same square outline 64 bits (8 bytes) wide by 64 scan lines long. Uncoded Data Uncoded Data is not compressed. Only those bytes needed to form the image are sent. Each bit represents a single dot. In the first byte, bit 7 corresponds to the first dot in the raster row, bit 5 to the third dot, and so forth. Example: ESC *p300x300Y *t100R *r0F ESC*b0M ESC *r1A ESC*b8W 'FF ESC*b8W '80 ESC *b8W '80 ... ESC*b8W '80 ESC *b8W 'FF ESC*rB ESC ESC FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF |Move the cursor to 1" x 1" (1 in. from top margin and 1 in. from left edge of logical page) |Set resolution to 100 dots per inch |Rotate image to match current orientation |Set compression mode to Uncoded |Start raster graphics at current position FF'x |Raster data uncompressed 01'x 01'x |Repeat to provide 64 total scan lines 01'x FF'x |End graphics 2-90 PCL Run-Length Encoded Data Run-Length Encoded Data is interpreted in pairs of bytes. The first byte: • • • • Acts as a counter, or control byte. Indicates how many times to repeat the data in the second byte. Can be from 0 (no repetition) to 255. The second byte is the data byte. Example: *p300x600Y *b1M ESC*r1A ESC *b2W '07FF'x ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ... ESC*b6W '0080 0500 0001'x ESC*b2W '07FF'x ESC *rB ESC ESC |Move cursor to 1" x 2" |Set compression to Run-Length |Start raster graphics at current position |Run-Length: 8x'FF'x |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |... |1x'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1x'01'x |8x'FF'x |End graphics Tagged Image File Format TIFF “Packbits” contain a control byte (a signed number) that indicates whether the raster data bytes are to be repeated (up to 127 times) or printed as encoded data. • • For control values of 0 through 127, the next (Control+1) byte(s) is uncoded. For control values of -1 through -127 ('FF'x - '81'x), the next byte is repeated (Abs(Control)+1) times. Example: *p300x900Y *b2M ESC*r1A ESC*b2W 'F9FF'x ESC *b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x ESC*b9W '078000000000000001'x ... ESC *b6W '0080 FB00 0001'x ESC *b2W 'F9FF'x ESC *rB ESC ESC |Move cursor to 1" x 3" |Set compression to TIFF |Start Raster Graphics at current position | TIFF: 8x'FF'x |1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x or |8: '8000000000000001'x |... |1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1: '01'x |8x'FF'x |End graphics 2-91 PCL Delta Row Delta Row is a compression mode that identifies and transmits only those bytes different from the ones in a preceding row. The control byte consists of two parts: • • High 3 bits: Number of bytes to replace +1 (1 to 8). Low 5 bits: Offset from last unmodified byte (0-30); if the offset is 31, the next byte(s) is added to the offset until the next byte is not 255. Example: *p300x1200Y *b3M ESC*r1A ESC ESC *b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x *b9W 'E08000000000000001'x ESC*b0W ... ESC*b0W ESC*b9W 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x ESC *rB ESC ESC |Move cursor to 1" x 4" |Set compression to Delta Row |Start raster graphics at current position |Num Offset |'111 00000'b=8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x |8 at 0: '8000000000000001'x |No bytes change |No bytes change |8 at 0: '8FFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x |End graphics 2-92 PCL Adaptive Compression Adaptive compression allows the combined use of compression methods 0 through 3 (Uncoded, Run-Length Encoded, TIFF, and Delta Row). It also allows the printing of empty rows (all zeros) or duplicate rows. • • The Transfer Raster Data command size includes all rows (scan lines). Scan Mode and SizeH,L are three-byte primary control strings: CountH and CountL. Table 2-50: Adaptive Compression Control Strings Scan Mode CountH,CountL Data 0 Data sizeH,L Uncoded raster scan data 1 Data sizeH,L Size of Run-length encoded data (high,low) 2 Data sizeH,L Size of Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) data (high,low) 3 Data SizeH,L Size of Delta Row data (high,low) 4 NumberH,L of empty rows None 5 NumberH,L of duplicate rows None 254 Data SizeH,L TIFF word 255 Data SizeH,L TIFF double-word Example: *p300x1500Y *b5M ESC *b29W '03 0009'x 'E0FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF'x '01 0006'x '0080 FB00 0001'x '05 0035'x '02 0002'x 'F9FF 'x ESC*rB ESC ESC |Move cursor to 1" x 5" |Set the compression to Adaptive Compression |Raster Data: 29 bytes follow | Delta Row: 8 at 0: 'FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh'x | Run Length: 1:'80'x, 6x'00'x, 1:'01'x | Duplicate rows: 61 times | TIFF: 8x'FF'x |End graphics 2-93 PCL Zlib Zlib is a generic compression method. It refers to a standard for compression as well as the library that implements the standard. The zlib compression method uses the deflate algorithm. This same algorithm is used by more widely known compression utilities such as PKZIP and GZIP. Compressed data is a series of variably-sized blocks. An encoder determines how to break the data into blocks and finds the best compression method to use for each block. An encoder works based on the following principles. The encoder creates a dictionary containing different characters in a set of data. Short strings of bits represent more commonly occurring characters, and long strings of bits represent less frequently used characters. A probability tree determines which characters are frequently used. Repeated patterns in a string of characters are identified and stored, so the string doesn’t have to be stored multiple times. A three-bit zlib header is added to the beginning of a block to describe the type of compression used and indicates whether the block is a final block. Other information in the header includes checksums, compression algorithm used, and the level of compression. In compression all checksums are set to zero and in decompression the checksums are ignored. The memory required for zlib compression and decompression is independent of the size of the data to be compressed or decompressed. The number 999 does not conflict with other compression types, so it is used to represent zlib compression. See page 2-88 for more information. Group 3 and Group 4 Raster Compression Since Group 4 images do not use line endings, the width of the image must be specified using the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S). The compressed image data is sent to the printer using the Transfer Raster Data command (ESC*b#W). The maximum number of bytes that can be sent using the Transfer Raster Data command is 32K bytes. Images larger than 32K bytes must be broken up and sent using multiple commands. It does not matter where the image is broken, or how many Transfer Raster Data commands are used. Once the image is started (with a Transfer Raster Data command), no other commands are allowed until the entire image has been sent. 2-94 PCL The following example prints a Group 4 image file that is 256 bits wide and 9,645 bytes long: *b1002M *r256S ESC*r1A ESC *b9645W ...[Group 4 image data]... ESC*rB ESC ESC |Set Raster Compression to Group 4 |Define width of image in input bits |Start Raster Graphics at current position |9,645 bytes of a Group 4 image |End Raster Graphics All lines of data must be the same length. If they are not, zeroes (0) must be added to attain the same length. Note: If the uncompressed image extends beyond the logical page dimensions or beyond the raster width specified in the Raster Width command (ESC*r#S), the image is clipped at print time. Additional Compression Modes When the compression mode is 1008 (Lexmark Adaptive), TIFF word and doubleword can be printed using compression scan modes 254 and 255 respectively. This compression method sends a raster image as a block of raster data. 2-95 PCL Macros When creating a macro, first assign it an ID number. If this number is identical to an existing macro ID in RAM, the old macro is deleted when you specify the Macro Control Start Definition. Next, start the macro definition, send the contents of the macro, and stop the macro definition. Note: Although a macro may be called or executed from within another macro (nesting), a macro cannot be defined within another macro definition. Each macro must be defined separately. Example: This example creates a macro to print the Wigit Corp. logo, then calls the logo macro in the body of a letter. &f1Y &f0X ESC &a+72H ESC(8U ESC(s1p18v0s3b4101T W ESC&a-21.6H ESC(s12v1S igit ESC&a+72H ESC(s18v0S C ESC(s12v1S orp. ESC &a+72H ESC&f1X ESC &f10X ... ... From: ESC &f1y3X ... Thank you for ... ESC &f1y3X ... ESC ESC |Set the macro ID to 1 |Start the macro definition |Relative move right 1/10 inch (+72/720th) |Select Roman-8 symbol set |Select CG Times 18 point bold |Print W |Relative move left 0.03 inch |Select (CG Times) 12 point (bold) italic |Print igit |Relative move right 1/10 inch |Select 18 point and turn off italic |Print C |Select 12 point italic |Print orp. |Relative move right 1/10 inch |End of macro definition |Make Macro ID 1 permanent |Print the header From: |Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro |Print the letter |Print the closing |Set the macro ID to 1 and call the macro 3-1 PJL CHAPTER 3: Printer Job Language Your printer supports complete Printer Job Language (PJL) commands, including certain commands that cause the printer to enter PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, and Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS). To determine which commands your printer supports, see Appendix B: “PJL Support” on page B-1. PJL Command Notation The syntax for each supported PJL command is listed in this chapter. The following character codes are used throughout the chapter to illustrate the syntax of each PJL command. Table 3-1: PJL Command Notation Character Code Description Hex Code Decimal Code Escape Character 0x1B 27 Line Feed Character 0x0A 10 Carriage Return Character 0x0D 13 Form Feed Character 0x0C 12 Horizontal Tab 0x09 9 Universal Exit Language 0x1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35 58 3-2 PJL Notes: • Parameters enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and not required for command execution. • The PJL interpreter requires uppercase for the @PJL prefix for all PJL commands except the Universal Exit Language (UEL) command. The rest of the PJL command is not case sensitive. The UEL command is case sensitive. • All PJL commands except UEL must be terminated with a line feed character ( ). Kernel Commands UNIVERSAL EXIT LANGUAGE Command The Universal Exit Language (UEL) command terminates the current printer language and allows dynamic switching into PJL. Syntax: %-12345X Notes: • If the printer receives this command while in PCL emulation, it performs a Printer Language Reset (ESCE) before exiting PCL emulation. • If the printer receives this command while in PostScript emulation, it performs an End-of-Job (EOJ) command before exiting PostScript emulation (Ctrl-D). The PJL commands must immediately follow the UEL command (that is, the X in the UEL syntax must be immediately followed by the @PJL of the next PJL command). 3-3 PJL ENTER LANGUAGE Command This command causes the printer to enter the specified language, such as PCL emulation, PostScript emulation, or PPDS. Syntax: @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = language[ ] Notes: • language is PCL, PCL3, PCLXL, PostScript, or PPDS. • You can use uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. (@PJL must be uppercase; all others can be mixed or lowercase.) Example: @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PostScript[ ] enters PostScript emulation. COMMENT Command This command lets you add descriptive comments to your PJL job. Syntax: @PJL COMMENT words[ ] Notes: • When the printer receives this command, it is ignored. • The words parameter can be any combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs. • The COMMENT command is terminated by the line feed character ( ). 3-4 PJL Job Separation Commands Your printer supports the PJL JOB and EOJ commands. When the printer receives a JOB command, the print timeout is multiplied by 10; when the printer receives a PJL EOJ command, the print timeout is reset to the user default. The Waiting message appears on the printer operator panel display or through MarkVision Professional until an EOJ command is received or until the print timeout expires. Your printer also supports the PASSWORD parameter for the PJL JOB command. JOB Command The host computer can use the JOB command to separate print data into various parts or jobs. Specifically, the JOB command signifies to the printer the start of a print job. Use the EOJ command to signify the end of a job. In addition, use the JOB/EOJ pair to accomplish the following: • Provide a job name (the name displays on the printer operator panel or through MarkVision Professional). • Indicate which pages of the job should be printed. • Monitor the job status as it prints. Syntax: @PJL JOB [NAME = "job name"] [START = first page] [END = last page] [PASSWORD = number][ ] Notes: • The JOB command should only be used in conjunction with the EOJ command. • After receiving a JOB command, the printer does not process a UEL command as a PJL job boundary until it receives the corresponding EOJ. Instead, UELs occurring within a JOB/EOJ pair are processed as printer language resets (for example, PCL ESCE). 3-5 PJL Parameters: NAME = "job name" Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job. The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The job name must be enclosed in double quotes, as indicated by the command syntax. START = first page Use the START parameter in conjunction with the END parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards pages of a job until the page specified by this parameter is reached. The first page range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the START parameter causes the printer to start printing with page 1 of the job. END = last page Use the END parameter in conjunction with the START parameter to skip the printing of a particular portion of the job. The emulator discards all pages of a job after the last page has been printed. The specification of last page is relative to page 1 of the print job and its range is from 1 to 2,147,483,647. Omission of the END parameter causes the printer to print all pages to the end of the job. PASSWORD = number A system administrator can control which jobs, and therefore which users, are allowed to modify the printer default or NVRAM variables by declaring a PJL password. With a PJL password declared, the PASSWORD parameter with the correct PASSWORD number must be specified in order to modify the default printer environment. A PJL JOB command with the correct PASSWORD must be issued before any PJL command can modify an NVRAM setting. The PJL EOJ command terminates the job and disables any further modification of NVRAM. If a PJL password is declared and the wrong PASSWORD number is specified on the PJL JOB command, the printer will delay one half of a second before processing the next command. 3-6 PJL For detailed information on PJL password protection, see “File and Device Protection Commands” on page 3-93. Note: Setting a default PJL password disables the use of PJL DEFAULT and INITIALIZE commands. (See “DEFAULT Command” on page 3-8 and “INITIALIZE Command” on page 3-11.) EOJ Command The EOJ command signifies the end of a print job. Syntax: @PJL EOJ [NAME = "job name"][ ] Note: Only use the EOJ command in conjunction with the JOB command. Parameter: NAME = "job name" Use the NAME parameter to assign a character string name to a particular job. The name may be any combination of printable characters, spaces, or horizontal tabs up to a maximum of 80 characters, spaces, or tabs. The NAME string may be different from the NAME string specified in the JOB command. The job name must be enclosed in double quotes. 3-7 PJL Environment Commands and Variables This section describes the printer environment variables and the PJL commands used to modify or query the variables. Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers. Table 3-2: Environment Variable Categories Categories Beginning on Page ... Common Variables for Both Printer Languages 3-12 Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages 3-19 Common Variables for PCL emulation 3-48 Printer Unique Variables for PCL emulation 3-49 Common Variables for PostScript emulation 3-51 Printer Unique Variables for PostScript emulation 3-52 Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables 3-53 The following commands modify the environment variables, and are described in this section: • • • • DEFAULT SET INITIALIZE RESET The following commands query the environment variables, and are described in “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54. • • • • INQUIRE DINQUIRE INFO ECHO 3-8 PJL DEFAULT Command This command modifies the default setting for the specified environment variable and stores the setting in the printer NVRAM. The new setting is activated with the occurrence of the next PJL reset condition. Syntax: @PJL DEFAULT [command modifier:value] variable=value[ ] [command modifier:value] The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. • A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12, and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19. • LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.) • LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific to PostScript emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51, and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.) • LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE variables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are: device flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive) filename A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. filetype An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See “Table 3-22: Variables for Flash and Disk File and Password Commands” on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive. 3-9 PJL variable=value The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command. They are marked Set Only. SET Command This command modifies the current setting for the specified environment variable. The new setting is active immediately, and remains active until the next occurrence of a PJL reset condition. Use the SET command to modify any currently defined environment variable that cannot be set using the desired printer language. For example, use the PJL SET command to set Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) or Page Protect, which cannot be set within a printer language such as PCL emulation. Syntax: @PJL SET [command modifier:value] variable=value[ ] where [command modifier:value] The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be modified. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. • A [command modifier:value] is not required for variables listed in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12, and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19. • LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.) • LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51, and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.) 3-10 • PJL LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE variables. (See “Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are: device flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive) filename A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. filetype An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive. variable=value The supported variables and values are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. Note: Variables may be modified by the DEFAULT command, except those marked Read Only. Some variables may only be modified using the PJL SET command. These variables cannot be modified using the DEFAULT command. They are marked Set Only. 3-11 PJL INITIALIZE Command This command restores both the current and default environment variables to their factory default values and updates the printer NVRAM. This command affects all of the variables listed in “Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12 through “Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52, except the following: • • • • • • • • • • All read only variables PASSWORD LANG LRESOURCESAVE LDOWNLOADTARGET LPPDS LHONORINIT LUSDEFAULTS PARALLEL RESOURCESAVE Note: This command does not affect LRESOURCE variables listed in “Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53. Syntax: @PJL INITIALIZE[ ] RESET Command This command resets the current environment variables to the settings stored in the printer NVRAM. Therefore, any variables modified by the PJL SET command are returned to their default value after execution of the PJL RESET command. Syntax: @PJL RESET[ ] 3-12 PJL Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers. The following common variables are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation, unless otherwise noted. Therefore, the [command modifier:value] parameter should not be specified. To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-1. Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages Variable Function Selections Factory Default AUTOCONT Auto Continue 0, 5 to 255, OFF, ON 0 (DEFAULT only) A value of 0 or OFF indicates Auto Continue is disabled. A value of ON indicates Auto Continue is set to 30. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE on the Auto Continue variable returns a numeric value. Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. BINDING Duplex Bind LONGEDGE, SHORTEDGE LONGEDGE BITSPERPIXEL Image Enhancement Technology and Image Enhancement Technology Type 1, 2, 4, Auto 1 A value of 1 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to Off. A value of 2 or 4 indicates the Image Enhancement Technology setting is set to On. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Image Enhancement Technology as follows: • If Image Enhancement Technology is set to Off, 1 is returned. • If Image Enhancement Technology is set to On, 2 or 4 is returned depending on the Image Enhancement Technology Type setting. If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to On, the numerical value of BITSPERPIXEL is returned. If Image Enhancement Technology Type is set to Auto, a value of 2 or 4 is returned depending on the amount of total memory installed. CLEARABLEWARNINGS (READ only) COPIES Auto Continue JOB, ON from operator If Auto Continue is set to On, JOB is returned. panel non-fatal warning messages If Auto Continue is set to Off, ON is returned. ON Number of copies of each page 1 1 to 999 Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999. 3-13 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default CPLOCK Disables menus ON, OFF OFF (DEFAULT only) ON disables the printer operator panel menus. OFF enables menus. DENSITY Print Darkness 1 to 5 • • • • • 1 = Lightest 2 = Lighter 3 = Normal 4 = Darker 5 = Darkest 2, 3, 4 (Model specific) To determine the default value of your printer, see “Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-1. DUPLEX Duplex ON, OFF OFF ECONOMODE Toner Saver ON, OFF OFF FORMATTERNUMBER Unique printer identifier The value of the NVRAM serial number field is returned. Set by printer manufacturer (READ only) The NVRAM serial number field is set to the printer serial number. In order to guarantee that a unique identifier exists in this field, the printer writes a random alphanumeric string into this field whenever the critical byte area in NVRAM is re-initialized. FORMLINES Lines per page 1 to 255 Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. HOLD (SET only) HOLDKEY (SET only) Print and Hold ON, OFF, STORE, PROOF 60, 64 (Country specific) OFF The HOLD variable interacts with the HOLDKEY and HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see HOLDTYPE on page 3-14. Print and Hold PIN “PIN” PIN is a text string consisting of exactly four numerals. Only the numerals 1 through 6 are valid. Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and indicates no PIN is specified. The HOLDKEY variable interacts with the HOLD and HOLDTYPE variables. For more information, see HOLDTYPE as follows. NULL (no PIN) 3-14 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default HOLDTYPE Print and Hold Type PUBLIC, PRIVATE PUBLIC (SET only) The HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE variables interact with each other as follows: • When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to a valid PIN, and HOLDTYPE is set to Private, Confidential Print capability is available. • When HOLD is set to On, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”, and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Repeat Print capability is available. • When HOLD is set to Store, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”, and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Reserve Print capability is available. • When HOLD is set to Proof, HOLDKEY is set to “ ”, and HOLDTYPE is set to Public, Verify Print capability is available. • Print and Hold capabilities are not available with any other possible combination of HOLD, HOLDKEY, and HOLDTYPE settings. IMAGEADAPT Resolution reduction ON, OFF ON INTRAY2 Tray lock - Tray 2 UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY3 Tray lock - Tray 3 UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY4 Tray lock - Tray 4 UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY5 Tray lock - Tray 5 UNLOCKED, LOCKED UNLOCKED INTRAY1SIZE Tray 1 installed size, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE, STATEMENT LETTER, A4 (Country specific) Tray 2 installed size, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT LETTER, A4 (Country specific) Tray 3 installed size, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT LETTER, A4 (Country specific) Tray 4 installed size, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT LETTER, A4 (Country specific) Tray 5 installed size, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, 11X17, STATEMENT LETTER, A4 (Country specific) Print and Hold Jobname “jobname” NULL (No jobname) (DEFAULT only) (SET only) INTRAY2SIZE (SET only) INTRAY3SIZE (SET only) INTRAY4SIZE (SET only) INTRAY5SIZE (SET only) JOBNAME (SET only) jobname is a text string truncated to 24 characters. Note: A null (“ ”) string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Jobname is specified. 3-15 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default JOBOFFSET Offset Pages ON, OFF, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENCOPIES OFF INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of Offset Pages as follows: • If Offset Pages is set to Off, OFF is returned. • If Offset Pages is set to Between Jobs or Between Copies, ON is returned. Offset refers to stacking entire print jobs or copies of the same print job in two separate groups in an output bin. LANG (DEFAULT only) LOWTONER Default display language DANISH, GERMAN, ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, ITALIAN, DUTCH, NORWEGIAN, SWEDISH, PORTUGUESE, FINNISH, JAPANESE, RUSSIAN, POLISH, HUNGARIAN, TURKISH, CZECH Country specific Toner Alarm ON, OFF, CONTINUE, STOP ON, CONTINUE (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) A value of ON or CONTINUE indicates the Toner Alarm setting is set Off. The value of OFF or STOP indicates the Toner Alarm setting is Single. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Toner Alarm as follows: • If Toner Alarm is set to Off, CONTINUE is returned. • If Toner Alarm is set to Single, STOP is returned. • If Toner Alarm is set to Continuous, STOP is returned. MANUALFEED (READ only) MEDIATYPE Manual feed selection OFF Default paper source, default formatting size PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, “name” OFF Printer always returns OFF. PLAIN name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. MPTRAY (DEFAULT only) ORIENTATION Multipurpose feeder configuration CASSETTE, MANUAL, FIRST Print orientation PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE CASSETTE Sets the configuration of the Multipurpose Feeder. This variable does not affect PostScript emulation. PORTRAIT 3-16 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default OUTBIN Output Bin UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Output Bin setting returns: PAGEPROTECT Page Protect Output Bin setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” AUTO, ON AUTO A value of ON indicates the Page Protect setting is set On. The value of AUTO indicates the Page Protect setting is set Off. INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Page Protect as follows: • If Page Protect is set Off, AUTO is returned. • If Page Protect is set On, ON is returned. PAPER Default paper source, default formatting size Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, JISB4, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE LETTER, A4 (Country specific) 3-17 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default PARALLEL Parallel Protocol SLOW, FAST FAST (DEFAULT only) A value of SLOW indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is Standard. The value of FAST indicates the Parallel Protocol setting is FASTBYTES. (Port Specific) INQUIRE or DINQUIRE returns the value of the Parallel Protocol as follows: • If Parallel Protocol is set as Standard, SLOW is returned. • If Parallel Protocol is set as Fastbytes, FAST is returned. PASSWORD (DEFAULT only) Default password for PJL NVRAM security 0 to 65535 0 Locks the printer operator panel to keep the user defaults from changing. Refer to your printer user documentation for more information. The Default PJL password is 0. If the PJL password is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns ENABLED. If the PJL password is equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the PASSWORD variable returns DISABLED. See the PASSWORD parameter of the JOB command on page 3-5 for more information. PERSONALITY (Port specific) SmartSwitch settings PCL, POSTSCRIPT, AUTO AUTO PERSONALITY controls the SmartSwitch settings for the interface link on which the PJL command is received. If AUTO is sent, both PS SmartSwitch and PCL Smartswitch menu settings are set to ON. If PCL is sent, PS SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PCL SmartSwitch is set to ON. If POSTSCRIPT is sent, PCL SmartSwitch is set to OFF and PS SmartSwitch is set to ON. When queried, AUTO is returned if both SmartSwitch settings are ON. If one SmartSwitch setting is OFF, the printer language whose SmartSwitch setting is ON is returned. If both SmartSwitch settings are OFF, the default printer language is returned. POWERSAVE (DEFAULT only) Power Save feature ON, OFF ON enables the power-saving feature. OFF disables the power-saving feature. Note: Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. ON 3-18 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default POWERSAVETIME Power Save time, in minutes 0 to 120 (Model specific) 20 (DEFAULT only) 0 to 240 (Model specific) (0 indicates the Power Saver Time feature is disabled.) The time the printer remains idle before it enters Power Save mode when POWERSAVE is On. Note: If a value greater than 120 or 240 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 120 or 240 based on the printer model. QTY (SET only) Collation Collated Copies (QTY) 0 to 999 0 Used to request the number of collated copies of a print job. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for QTY. If Collation - Collated Copies (QTY) is set to Off, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0. Note: If a value greater than 999 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 999. REPRINT Jam Recovery ON, OFF, AUTO AUTO RESOLUTION Print Resolution 300, 600, 1200 600 RESOURCESAVE Resource Save ON, OFF, AUTO OFF, AUTO (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) ON indicates Resource Save is set On. OFF and AUTO indicate Resource Save is set to Off. See “Table B-1: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-1 for the default value of your printer. RET Print Quality Enhancement Technology (PQET) OFF, DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, ON ON If this value is set through PJL, the same value is returned on a PJL inquiry. DARK, MEDIUM, LIGHT, and ON values indicate that PQET is On. OFF indicates PQET is Off. TIMEOUT Print timeout, in seconds 0 to 255 The time the printer remains idle before the job is forced to print. Note: If a value greater than 255 is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to 255. 90 3-19 PJL Table 3-3: Common Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default USERNAME Print and Hold Username “username” NULL (No username) (SET only) username is a text string truncated to 24 characters. Note: A null (“ “) string is an acceptable value and indicates no Print and Hold Username is specified. WIDEA4 A4 width NO, YES NO NO indicates the A4 width is 198 mm. YES indicates the A4 width is 203 mm. Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages The following variables are unique to some Lexmark printers and are supported for both PCL emulation and PostScript emulation. Therefore, the [command modifier:value] parameter should not be specified. To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3. Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages Variable Function Selections Factory Default LACTIVEBINRESET Active Bin Reset MANUAL, AUTOMATIC MANUAL Advanced Status ON, OFF ON (DEFAULT only) LADVANCEDSTATUS (DEFAULT only) (Port specific) LALARMCONTROL ON enables parallel bidirectional support. OFF disables parallel bidirectional support. Alarm Control OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS SINGLE LAUTOCRLF Auto CR after LF ON, OFF OFF LAUTOLFCR Auto LF after CR ON, OFF OFF LBLANKPAGES Blank Pages DONOTPRINT, PRINT DONOTPRINT (DEFAULT only) Note: Some printers have a fixed value of DONOTPRINT. LBONDLENGTH Bond Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Bond Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF (DEFAULT only) LBONDLOADING (DEFAULT only) 3-20 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function LBONDOUTBIN Assign UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, Type/Bin - Bond OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” (DEFAULT only) Selections Factory Default UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on bond paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Bond setting returns: LBONDTEXTURE Assign Type/Bin Bond setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Bond Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH ROUGH Bond Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LBWLOCK Black & White Lock ON, OFF OFF LCANCEL Cancel Control ON, OFF ON LCARDSTOCKLENGTH Card Stock Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Card Stock Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF (DEFAULT only) LBONDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) (DEFAULT only) LCARDSTOCKLOADING (DEFAULT only) 3-21 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCARDSTOCKOUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Card Stock UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on card stock. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting returns: LCARDSTOCKTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCARDSTOCKWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCOLLATION Assign Type/Bin Card Stock setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Card Stock Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Card Stock Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Collation Mode ON, OFF OFF If Collation is ON, the pages of the print job are collated. For example, if the job contains three pages and two copies are requested, collated output prints pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. If collation is set to OFF, uncollated output prints pages 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3. LCOLORCORRECTION LCOLOREDLENGTH (DEFAULT only) Indicates which color target the printer emulates NONE, DISPLAY, SWOP, OFF, AUTO, VIVID, DUOTONE, MANUAL Colored Paper Length NORMAL, SHORT AUTO, VIVID (Model specific) See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value of your printer. NORMAL 3-22 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCOLOREDLOADING Colored Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) LCOLOREDOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on colored paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper setting returns: LCOLOREDTEXTURE Assign Type/Bin Colored Paper setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Colored Paper Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Colored Paper Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LCOLORMODEL Color Model CMYK, RGB, BLACK RGB, CMYK (Model specific) LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS Universal Units of Measure INCHES, MILLIMETERS INCHES, MILLIMETERS (Country specific) LCUSTOMPAPERWIDTH Universal Width 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in. 216, 305 mm 8.5, 12 in. (Model and country specific) (DEFAULT only) LCOLOREDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) Note: Values are determined to be inches or millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS setting. 3-23 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMPAPERHEIGHT Universal Height 76 to 915 in increments of 1 mm 3 to 36.01 in increments of 0.01 in. 356, 360, 457 mm 14, 14.17, 18 in. (Model and country specific) Note: Values are determined to be inches or millimeters based on the LCUSTOMPAPERUNITS setting. LCUSTOMPAPERFEED Universal Feed Direction SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE SHORTEDGE LCUSTOMTYPE1LENGTH Custom Type 1 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Custom Type 1 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Custom Type 1 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER Custom Type 1 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE1 (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1NAME (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. 3-24 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE1OUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 1 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 setting returns: LCUSTOMTYPE1TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE1WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2MEDIA (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 1 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Custom Type 1 Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Custom Type 1 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Custom Type 2 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Custom Type 2 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Custom Type 2 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER 3-25 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE2NAME Custom Type 2 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE2 (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE2OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 2 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 setting returns: LCUSTOMTYPE2TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE2WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3LOADING (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 2 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Custom Type 2 Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Custom Type 2 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Custom Type 3 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Custom Type 3 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF 3-26 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE3MEDIA Custom Type 3 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER Custom Type 3 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE3 (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3NAME (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE3OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 3 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 setting returns: LCUSTOMTYPE3TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE3WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4LENGTH (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 3 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Custom Type 3 Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Custom Type 3 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Custom Type 4 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL 3-27 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE4LOADING Custom Type 4 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Custom Type 4 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER Custom Type 4 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE4 (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4NAME (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE4OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 4 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 setting returns: LCUSTOMTYPE4TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE4WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 4 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Custom Type 4 Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Custom Type 4 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL 3-28 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE5LENGTH Custom Type 5 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Custom Type 5 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Custom Type 5 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER Custom Type 5 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE5 (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE5NAME (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE5OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 5 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 5 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 5 setting returns: LCUSTOMTYPE5TEXTURE (DEFAULT only) Custom Type 5 Texture Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 5 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL 3-29 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE5WEIGHT Custom Type 5 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Custom Type 6 Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Custom Type 6 Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Custom Type 6 Media PAPER, COATED, GLOSSY, TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, CARDSTOCK, ENVELOPE, COTTONPAPER PAPER Custom Type 6 Name "name" CUSTOMTYPE6 (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6LENGTH (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6LOADING (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6MEDIA (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6NAME (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LCUSTOMTYPE6OUTBIN (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 6 UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on custom type 6 paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 6 setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Custom Type 6 setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) 3-30 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LCUSTOMTYPE6TEXTURE Custom Type 6 Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Custom Type 6 Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Download Target RAM, FLASH, FLASH1, DISK, DISK1 RAM LDRYTIMEDELAY Dry Time Delay 0, 3 ... 30, OFF, AUTO OFF LDUPLICATEHELDJOBS Delete or Save Print and Hold Jobs DELETE, SAVE DELETE LENVELOPEENHANCE Envelope Enhance ON, OFF ON Envelope Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Assign Type/Bin Envelope UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) LCUSTOMTYPE6WEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LDOWNLOADTARGET (SET only) (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPELENGTH (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPEOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) If the device specified as the download target is write or read/write password protected, the download target will not be changed. name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on envelopes. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Envelope setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” 3-31 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LENVELOPETEXTURE Envelope Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Envelope Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL ESC Character Substitution 0 to 255 27 Fax Resolution STANDARD, FINE, SUPERFINE, ULTRAFINE STANDARD (DEFAULT only) LENVELOPEWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LESCCHAR (READ only) (Port specific) LFAXRESOLUTION (SET only) LFAXREDIAL Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXRESOLUTION variable. For more information, see “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54. Fax Redial (SET only) LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY (SET only) LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG (SET only) LFEEDERPAPERTYPE 0 to 14 5 Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIAL variable. For more information, see “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54. Fax Redial Frequency 1 to 200 Fax Transmission Log PRINT, DONOTPRINT, PRINTERROR Envelope Feeder Paper Type ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, “name” 3 Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXREDIALFREQUENCY variable. For more information, see “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54. PRINTERROR Note: Status Readback commands return a ? when no SET command has modified the LFAXTRANSMISSIONLOG variable. For more information, see “Status Readback Commands” on page 3-54. ENVELOPE name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. LGLOSSYLOADING Glossy Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF 3-32 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LGLOSSYOUTPUTBIN Assign Type/Bin - Glossy UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on Glossy paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting returns: Assign Type/Bin Glossy setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” LGLOSSYTEXTURE Glossy Paper Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL LGLOSSYWEIGHT Glossy Paper Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LHOLEPUNCHALARM Hole Punch Alarm OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS OFF LHOLEPUNCHMODE Hole Punch Mode 2HOLE, 3HOLE, 4HOLE 3HOLE (US) Honor INIT Signal HONORSIGNAL, DONOTHONORSIGNAL DONOTHONOR SIGNAL LIMAGEBRIGHTNESS Image Brightness -100 to 100 0 LIMAGECONTRAST Image Contrast -100 to 100 0 LIMAGEENHANCE Image Enhancement Technology ON, OFF OFF LHONORINIT (DEFAULT only) 4HOLE (non-US) (Port specific) 3-33 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LIMAGEENHANCETYPE Image Enhancement Technology Type 2, 4, AUTO 2, 4 Page Image Orientation DONOTROTATE, ROTATEPAPER, ROTATEENVELOPES, ROTATESTAPLED, ROTATESTAPLEDANDENVELOPES, ROTATEALL DONOTROTATE LIMAGESMOOTHING Image Smoothing for PostScript ON, OFF OFF LINFEEDERSIZE Envelope feeder installed size, default formatting size COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE COM10, DL (Country specific) LINKALERT Ink Alert ON, OFF OFF LIMAGEORIENTATION (Model specific) Note: The factory default is ROTATEPAPER if an optional finisher is installed. Displays a printer attendance message when an ink cartridge is low. LINMPFEEDERSIZE Multipurpose feeder installed size, default formatting size Paper: A3, A3+, A4, A5, JISB4, B5PAPER, JISB5, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 LETTER, A4 (Country specific) LJAMRECOVERY Jam Recovery ON, OFF, AUTO AUTO LLABELSLENGTH Labels Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Labels Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF Envelopes: COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE (DEFAULT only) LLABELSLOADING (DEFAULT only) 3-34 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LLABELSOUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Labels UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on labels. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Labels setting returns: LLABELSTEXTURE Assign Type/Bin Labels setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Labels Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Labels Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LLASTTRAYRENUMBER Last Tray Renumber OFF, TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER OFF LLEFTMARGINOFFSET Left Margin Offset -128 to 127 0 LLETTERHEADLENGTH Letterhead Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Letterhead Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF (DEFAULT only) LLABELSWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) (DEFAULT only) LLETTERHEADLOADING (DEFAULT only) 3-35 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LLETTERHEADOUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Letterhead UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on letterhead paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting returns: LLETTERHEADTEXTURE Assign Type/Bin Letterhead setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Letterhead Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Letterhead Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LMANUALCOLORRGBTEXT Manual Color RGB Text OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY SRGBVIVID LMANUALCOLORRGBGRAPHICS Manual Color RGB Graphics OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY SRGBVIVID LMANUALCOLORRGBIMAGE Manual Color RGB Image OFF, VIVID, SRGBVIVID, SRGBDISPLAY SRGBDISPLAY LMANUALCOLORCMYKTEXT Manual Color CMYK Text OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK USCMYK (US) LMANUALCOLORCMYKGRAPHICS Manual Color CMYK Graphics OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK (DEFAULT only) LLETTERHEADWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) EUROCMYK (non-US) USCMYK (US) EUROCMYK (non-US) 3-36 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LMANUALCOLORCMYKIMAGE Manual Color CMYK Image OFF, VIVID, VIVIDCMYK, USCMYK, EUROCMYK USCMYK (US) LMANUALENVELOPESIZE Manual Envelope, default formatting size COM10, COM9, MONARCH, DL, C5, B5, OTHERENVELOPE COM10, DL (Country specific) LMANUALENVELOPETYPE Manual Envelope Type ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, “name” ENVELOPE EUROCMYK (non-US) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of custom print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. LMANUALPAPERSIZE Manual Paper, default formatting size A3, A3+, A4, A5, B4, B4PAPER, B5PAPER, CUSTOM, EXECUTIVE, FOLIO, JISB4, JISB5, LEDGER, LEGAL, LETTER, STATEMENT, 11X17 LETTER, A4 (Country specific) LMANUALPAPERTYPE Manual Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE3 (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LMPFEEDERPAPERTYPE Multipurpose Feeder Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 PLAIN (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of print material types. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LMULTIPAGEBORDER Multipage Border NONE, SOLID NONE LMULTIPAGEORDER Multipage Order HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, REVHORIZONTAL, REVVERTICAL HORIZONTAL 3-37 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LMULTIPAGEPRINT Multipage Printing OFF, 2UP, 3UP, 4UP, 6UP, 9UP, 12UP, 16UP OFF LMULTIPAGEVIEW Multipage View AUTO, SHORTEDGE, LONGEDGE AUTO LNPAP NPA Protocol Setting ON, OFF, AUTO AUTO Optional Output Bin 1 Name "name" (READ only) (Port specific) LOPTIONALOUTBIN1NAME (DEFAULT only) This value is reported for the interface link that the command is received. name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN1 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN2NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 2 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN2 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN3NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 3 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN3 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN4NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 4 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN4 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN5NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 5 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. OPTIONAL OUTBIN5 3-38 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LOPTIONALOUTBIN6NAME Optional Output Bin 6 Name "name" OPTIONAL OUTBIN6 (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN7NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 7 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN7 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN8NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 8 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN8 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN9NAME (DEFAULT only) Optional Output Bin 9 Name "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN9 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOPTIONALOUTBIN10NAME Optional Output Bin 10 Name (DEFAULT only) "name" name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. OPTIONAL OUTBIN10 When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LOUTBINCONFIG (DEFAULT only) Configure Output Bins MAILBOX, LINK, MAILBOXOVERFLOW, LINKOPTIONAL, TYPEASSIGNMENT MAILBOX 3-39 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LOVERFLOWOUTBIN Overflow Bin UPPER, LOWER, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. If an output bin is full, print jobs assigned to that output bin exit to the assigned overflow output bin. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Bin setting returns: LOVERFLOWTIMER (DEFAULT only) Overflow Timer, in minutes Overflow Bin setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” 0 to 255 0 A value of 0 (zero) indicates Overflow Timer is set to Disabled. If Overflow Timer is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns zero. If Overflow Timer is set to a numeric value, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Overflow Timer setting returns that value. LPAGECOUNT Page Count 0 to 999999 0 LPAGEMODE Print Area NORMAL, WHOLEPAGE, FULLPAGE NORMAL LPAPERSOURCE Default paper source TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER, MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE TRAY1, TRAY2 (Model specific) (READ only) Note: If any optional source is specified, but it is not installed, the default paper source is not changed. See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value of your printer. 3-40 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPICTUREGRADE PictureGrade™ ON, OFF ON LPLAINLENGTH Plain Paper Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Assign Type/Bin - Plain Paper UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) LPLAINOUTBIN (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on plain paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Plain setting returns: LPLAINTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LPLAINWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LPOWERSAVER (DEFAULT only) Assign Type/Bin Plain setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Plain Paper Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Plain Paper Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Power Saver time, in minutes 0 to 120 (Model specific) 20 0 to 240 (Model specific) (0 indicates the Power Saver feature is disabled.) Note: If a value outside the possible value range is specified by a SET or DEFAULT command, the value is changed to the closest value within the possible value range. Some printer models released in the year 2000 or later designated as Energy Star printers cannot have Power Saver disabled. 3-41 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPPDS Activate Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) printer language ON, OFF OFF (DEFAULT only) Use ON to enable PPDS printer language and OFF to disable PPDS printer language. After this command is processed, the printer performs a Power On Reset (POR) to activate the changes. Note: The following printer settings in NVRAM are changed when PPDS is activated: • PCL and PS SmartSwitch settings for each port are turned off • Printer Language is set to PPDS LPPDSFORMLINES (DEFAULT only) LPPDSLINESPERINCH Lines Per Page (PPDS) 1 to 255 64, 68 (Country specific) Lines Per Inch 0.25 to 30.00 in increments of 0.25 6.00 (DEFAULT only) LPREPRINTEDLENGTH (DEFAULT only) LPREPRINTEDLOADING (DEFAULT only) Note: If a Lines Per Inch setting outside this range is specified, the printer defaults to the closest number in the range. Preprinted Paper Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL Preprinted Paper Loading OFF, DUPLEX OFF 3-42 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPREPRINTEDOUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Preprinted Paper UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on preprinted paper. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Preprinted Paper setting returns: LPREPRINTEDTEXTURE (DEFAULT only) LPREPRINTEDWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) LPRINTBUFFER Assign Type/Bin Preprinted paper setting DINQUIRE or INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Preprinted Paper Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Preprinted Paper Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL Print Buffer control ON, OFF ON If ON is selected, Print Buffer displays with the Waiting message. If OFF is selected, Print Buffer does not display with the Waiting message. LPRINTHEADIDLETIME Printhead Idle Time 0 to 15 seconds 0 LPRINTERUSAGE Printer Usage MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD MAXSPEED, MAXYIELD (Model specific) LPRINTMENUSBUTTON Disable Print Menus from front panel ON, OFF ON (SET only) (DEFAULT only) 3-43 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPRINTQUALITY Print Quality Mode QUICKPRINT, NORMAL, PRESENTATION, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, 1200IMAGEQ, INKSAVER, NORMAL, BEST NORMAL LPUNCH Hole Punch ON, OFF OFF LREAROUTBINNAME Rear Output Bin Name "name" REAROUTBIN name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LREPEATPRINTLIMIT (DEFAULT only) Print and Hold Repeat Print Job Limit 0 to 50 jobs 5 Specifies the number of Repeat Print jobs that can be held in printer memory. If the Repeat Print Job Limit setting is not equal to 0, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns the numerical setting for LREPEATPRINTLIMIT. If Repeat Print Job Limit setting is set to Disabled, a DINQUIRE or INQUIRE returns 0. LRESET Reset Control ON, OFF ON When the LRESET variable is set to ON, RESET PRINTER is available in the JOB MENU when the printer is in the Busy or Waiting state. This is true for most printers with a printer operator panel. If this variable is set to OFF, RESET PRINTER is not available. LRESOURCESAVE Resource Save ON, OFF OFF LRIGHTMARGINOFFSET Right Margin Offset -10 to 10 0 LSCREENING Color Screening Selections COLORGRADE, IMAGESONLY, IET COLORGRADE LSEPARATORSHEETS Indicates where separator sheets are placed within the print job NONE, BETWEENCOPIES, BETWEENJOBS, BETWEENPAGES NONE LSEPARATORSOURCE Indicates which source contains the separator sheets TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, FEEDER, MPFEEDER, MANUALPAPER, MANUALENVELOPE TRAY1 (DEFAULT only) 3-44 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LSTANDARDOUTBINNAME Standard Output Bin Name "name" UPPER (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. When queried, the quotes are not returned around the string name. The default name is returned unless you have specified a custom name. LSTROKEWIDTH PostScript minimum stroke width 1 to 255 LSTAPLE Staple Job ON, OFF, AUTO, FRONT, BACK, DUAL, 0, 1, 2 OFF LSTAPLESEMPTYALARM Staples Empty Alarm OFF, SINGLE, CONTINUOUS OFF Staple Priming Bin OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10 OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONAL OUTBIN2 (Model specific) Staple Priming Source TRAY1, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER TRAY1 LSUBSTITUTESIZE Substitute Size OFF, LETTERA4, STATEMENTA5, 11X17A3, ALLLISTED OFF, LETTERA4, ALLLISTED (Model specific) LTHINCOAT Thin Coat ON, OFF ON LTOPBINROTATE Top Bin Timeout, in minutes 0 to 255 0 LTOPMARGINOFFSET Top Margin Offset -128 to 127 0 LTRANSPARENCYLENGTH Transparency Length NORMAL, SHORT NORMAL (DEFAULT only) LSTAPLETESTBIN (DEFAULT only) LSTAPLETESTSOURCE (DEFAULT only) (DEFAULT only) (DEFAULT only) The width of a line or a stroke between two points. 1 pel or 1/600th inch A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on LTOPBINROTATE returns the numeric value. 3-45 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LTRANSPARENCYOUTBIN Assign Type/Bin Transparency UPPER, LOWER, DISABLED, OPTIONALOUTBIN1, OPTIONALOUTBIN2, OPTIONALOUTBIN3, OPTIONALOUTBIN4, OPTIONALOUTBIN5, OPTIONALOUTBIN6, OPTIONALOUTBIN7, OPTIONALOUTBIN8, OPTIONALOUTBIN9, OPTIONALOUTBIN10, “name” UPPER, DISABLED (Model specific) (DEFAULT only) name is a variable that allows for custom naming of optional output bins. The text string is truncated to 24 characters. Specifies a selected output bin for jobs printed on transparencies. A DINQUIRE or INQUIRE on the Assign Type/Bin Transparency setting returns: Assign Type/Bin DINQUIRE or Transparency setting INQUIRE value Standard Bin Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Bin 4 Bin 5 Bin 6 Bin 7 Bin 8 Bin 9 Bin 10 “name” LTRANSPARENCYTEXTURE UPPER OPTIONALOUTBIN1 OPTIONALOUTBIN2 OPTIONALOUTBIN3 OPTIONALOUTBIN4 OPTIONALOUTBIN5 OPTIONALOUTBIN6 OPTIONALOUTBIN7 OPTIONALOUTBIN8 OPTIONALOUTBIN9 OPTIONALOUTBIN10 “name” Transparency Texture SMOOTH, NORMAL, ROUGH NORMAL Transparency Weight LIGHT, NORMAL, HEAVY NORMAL LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE PAPER Detected Type for Paper Tray 1 PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 PLAIN LTRAY1SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY Detected Type for Transparency- Tray 1 TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 TRANSPARENCY LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE PAPER Detected Type for Paper Tray 2 PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE2 LTRAY2SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 2 (DEFAULT only) LTRANSPARENCYWEIGHT (DEFAULT only) TRANSPARENCY 3-46 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE PAPER Detected Type for Paper Tray 3 PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE3 LTRAY3SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 3 TRANSPARENCY LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE PAPER Detected Type for Paper Tray 4 PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE4 LTRAY4SENSEDTYPE TRANSPARENCY Detected Type TRANSPARENCY, CUSTOMTYPE5 for Transparency - Tray 4 TRANSPARENCY LTRAY1AUTOSIZE Auto Size Sensing for Tray 1 ON, OFF ON Auto Size Sensing for Tray 2 ON, OFF ON Auto Size Sensing for Tray 3 ON, OFF ON Auto Size Sensing for Tray 4 ON, OFF ON Auto Size Sensing for Tray 5 ON, OFF ON Tray 1 Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN (DEFAULT only) LTRAY2AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY3AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY4AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY5AUTOSIZE (DEFAULT only) LTRAY1PAPERTYPE PLAIN, BOND, GLOSSY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE6 name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. 3-47 PJL Table 3-4: Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LTRAY2PAPERTYPE Tray 2 Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE2 (Model specific) name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value for your printer. LTRAY3PAPERTYPE Tray 3 Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE3 (Model specific) name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. See “Table B-2: Printer Unique PJL Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page B-3 for the default value for your printer. LTRAY4PAPERTYPE Tray 4 Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE4 (Model specific) name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. LTRAY5PAPERTYPE Tray 5 Paper Type PLAIN, COATED, GLOSSY, PHOTO, GREETINGCARD, IRONON, BOND, TRANSPARENCY, CARDSTOCK, LABELS, LETTERHEAD, PREPRINTED, COLORED, ENVELOPE, CUSTOMTYPE1, CUSTOMTYPE2, CUSTOMTYPE3, CUSTOMTYPE4, CUSTOMTYPE5, CUSTOMTYPE6, "name" PLAIN, CUSTOMTYPE5 (Model specific) name is a text string that is truncated to 24 characters. LTRAY1RENUMBER Tray 1 Renumber OFF, TRAY2, TRAY3, TRAY4, TRAY5, MPFEEDER OFF LTYPE1FONTS Enables Type 1 fonts for PCL emulation OFF, ON ON LUSDEFAULTS US/non-US defaults US, NONUS US, NONUS (Country specific) (DEFAULT only) 3-48 PJL Common Variables for PCL Emulation Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers. Use these variables only for PCL emulation. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example: @PJL SET LPARM:PCL FONTSOURCE=I To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-3: Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page B-11. Table 3-5: Common Variables for PCL Emulation Variable Function Selections Factory Default FONTNUMBER Font Number 0, 1, .... n 0 FONTSOURCE Font Source I, S, M1, M2, M3, M4, D1 I I S M1, M2, M3, M4 D1 Internal font source Permanent download fonts Flash font source Disk font source All other values default to internal font source. PITCH PTSIZE SYMSET Default pitch (fixed-pitch fonts) 0.08 to 100 (in increments of 0.01) Default point size (proportional spaced fonts) 1 to 1008 (in increments of 0.25) Symbol set for the default font For a list of the values for the Lexmark X422, see “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark X422” on page 2-9. 10.00 Note: If an invalid pitch is requested, the printer selects the closest pitch. 12.00 Note: If an invalid point size is requested, the printer selects the closest point size. For a list of the values for the Lexmark C510(n), see “Font and Symbol Set Support for the Lexmark C510(n)” on page 2-19. If a symbol set is requested that is not resident in the printer, the symbol set is not changed. PC8, PC850 (Country specific) 3-49 PJL Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation The following variables are unique to your printer and are supported in PCL emulation only. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:PCL. For example: @PJL SET LPARM:PCL LBITMAPROUNDING=OFF[ ] To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-4: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation” on page B-11. Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation Variable Function Selections Factory Default LA4WIDTH A4 Width in millimeters 198, 203 198 LASSIGNFEEDER Tray Renumber Assign Envelope Feeder OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMANUALENVELOPE Tray Renumber Assign Manual Envelope OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMANUALPAPER Tray Renumber OFF, 0 to 199 Assign Manual Paper Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNMPFEEDER Tray Renumber Assign Multipurpose Feeder OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. OFF 3-50 PJL Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LASSIGNTRAY1 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 1 OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY2 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 2 OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY3 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 3 OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY4 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 4 OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LASSIGNTRAY5 Tray Renumber Assign Tray 5 OFF, 0 to 199 OFF Variable used with PJL SET or DEFAULT command. OFF, 0 to 199, NONE OFF Variable used with PJL INQUIRE or DINQUIRE command. LBITMAPROUNDING Bitmap Font Partial Pel Rounding ON, OFF ON Some printers handle partial pel character escapement rounding of bitmap fonts differently. LBITMAPROUNDING offers a way of instructing the printer how to handle partial pel rounding of bitmap fonts. Bitmap rounding is compatible with the HewlettPackard Company’s LaserJet printers. LCOLOREXTENSIONS Color Extensions ON, OFF, HPCLJ5 ON 3-51 PJL Table 3-6: Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation (Continued) Variable Function Selections Factory Default LFONTCOMPATIBILITY Font Compatibility Level PCL5, PCL6 PCL6 LFONTPRIORITY Font Priority Search RESOLUTION, NORESOLUTION RESOLUTION (SET only) When RESOLUTION is specified, your printer is compatible with the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers. When NORESOLUTION is specified, font resolution is removed from the font selection priority criteria. Common Variables for PostScript Emulation Note: The word common applies to those variables common to both your printer and the Hewlett-Packard Company’s LaserJet printers. Use these variables only for PostScript emulation. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT. For example: @PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT JAMRECOVERY=OFF[ ] To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-5: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page B-12. Table 3-7: Common Variables for PostScript Emulation Variable Function Selections Factory Default JAMRECOVERY Jam Recovery ON, OFF OFF For queries, when the Jam Recovery setting is set to Auto, PJL returns the value of OFF. The remaining two Jam Recovery values, On and Off are returned by PJL as ON and OFF respectively. When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery OFF, the setting is actually set to Auto. When PJL is used to set Jam Recovery ON, the setting is set to ON. Changing this variable also affects PCL emulation. PRTPSERRS Print PS Errors ON, OFF OFF 3-52 PJL Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation The following variables are unique in some printers and are supported in PostScript emulation only. The [command modifier:value] parameter should be specified as LPARM:POSTSCRIPT. For example: @PJL SET LPARM:POSTSCRIPT LPICTUREGRADE=ON[ ] To determine which variables your printer supports, see Table B-6 on page B-12. Table 3-8: Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation Variable Function Selections Factory Default LPICTUREGRADE PictureGrade ON, OFF ON LPSFONTPRIORITY Font Priority RESIDENT, FLASHDISK RESIDENT Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables Use the following variables when additional storage devices are installed. The [command modifier:value] parameter of the DEFAULT, INQUIRE, DINQUIRE, and SET commands must be specified as LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype". For example: @PJL DEFAULT LRESOURCE : "device:filename.filetype"LDESCRIPTION="my description"[ ] Values for "device:filename.filetype" are: device flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive) filename A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, or the actual file name for data, Type 1 fonts, and demo files as shown on the Directory. The filename is case sensitive. filetype The identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets Using the DEFAULT command to modify any of these variables forces a write to flash or disk if resource collection mode is set to On before the command is executed. The DEFAULT command causes a PJL Reset. 3-53 PJL To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-7: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page B-13. Table 3-9: Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables Factory Default Variable Function Selections LDESCRIPTION Macro or Symbol Set Description 1 "alphanumeric string" (DEFAULT only) The description is limited to 16 characters and must be enclosed in double quotes. If more than 16 characters are specified by the DEFAULT command, the first 16 characters are used and a PJL parser warning is issued. NULL (no description) The DINQUIRE command can be used to query the file description. The description is returned in the response. LRWLOCK (DEFAULT only) Read/Write Lock (password) for an entire device or a particular file on the device 2 "alphanumeric string" This variable can be used with other PJL commands: • DEFAULT command The Read/Write password is limited to eight characters. If more than eight characters are specified by the PJL DEFAULT command, the password is truncated and a PJL warning is issued. NULL (no password) If a null (" ") password is given, password protection is removed from the specified device or file. • DINQUIRE or INQUIRE commands NOTSET Use these commands to determine if a password has been specified for a device or specific file. The response is one of the following: NOTSET SET EXPIRED The password has not been set or has been reset to zero. The password is defined and active. The password is reset to zero (flash memory only). The LDECLARE command can be used to temporarily unlock access to a device or particular file. See “File and Device Protection Commands” on page 3-93 for additional information about using passwords on these devices. LWLOCK (DEFAULT only) 1 2 Write Lock (password) for an entire device or particular file on the device 2 "alphanumeric string" Same as LRWLOCK, except the password limits write-only access instead of read-write access. NULL (no password) The macro or symbol set description is printed in the Description field of the Print Directory listing. To password protect a device, the command modifier:value should be LRESOURCE :"device:". The colon (:) and double quotes (" ") must be specified. 3-54 PJL Status Readback Commands Applications can request configuration and status information from the printer using the Status Readback commands. In addition, the printer can also be instructed to send unsolicited status information back to the host computer when asynchronous events occur, such as a memory error or a paper jam. To determine which commands your printer supports, see “Table B-8: Status Readback Commands” on page B-13. DINQUIRE Command This command is used to query the default setting (NVRAM) of the specified environment variable. Syntax: @PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[ ] Response Syntax: @PJL DINQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable value where: [command modifier:value] The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variable to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. • A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12, and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19. • LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.) 3-55 • PJL LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51, and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.) • LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari- ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are: device flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive) filename A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. filetype An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive. variable=value The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed. ECHO Command The ECHO command instructs the printer to return the specified words after the command is parsed. This command provides a method of capturing the status information returned by a specific print job. Syntax: @PJL ECHO [words][ ] Response Syntax: @PJL ECHO [words] words parameter The words parameter must start with a printable character and can consist of a combination of printable characters, spaces, and horizontal tabs. 3-56 PJL Note: The ECHO command is terminated by the line feed character. INFO Command The INFO command is used to query status information from the printer. “Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values” on page 3-56 lists the categories of information that can be queried. See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands. Syntax: @PJL INFO category[ ] Response Syntax: @PJL INFO category [one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs] category Table 3-10 lists the supported categories. Table 3-10: INFO Category Parameter Values Category Values Description ID Returns the model name or the model number stored in the printer NVRAM. CONFIG Returns the printer configuration, including paper sources, paper sizes, and installed options. MEMORY Returns the printer available memory. PAGECOUNT Returns the printer page count. STATUS Returns the printer current status. VARIABLES Returns the printer environment variables and values. USTATUS Returns the printer unsolicited status variables and values. 3-57 INFO CONFIG Response Syntax (An Example): @PJL INFO CONFIG IN TRAYS [2 ENUMERATED] INTRAY1 INTRAY2 MANUAL FEED OUT TRAYS [1 ENUMERATED] UPPER FACEDOWN PAPERS [13 ENUMERATED] LETTER LEGAL A4 A5 B5PAPER EXECUTIVE COM10 COM9 MONARCH DL C5 B5 OTHERENVELOPE LANGUAGES [1 ENUMERATED] PCL USTATUS [4 ENUMERATED] DEVICE JOB PAGE TIMED FLASH=1048576 DISK=543283200 MEMORY=2097152 DISPLAY LINES=2 SYSTEM FIRMWARE VERSION=250A ENGINE FIRMWARE VERSION=0 PJL 3-58 PJL INQUIRE Command This command is used to query the current setting of the specified environment variable. Syntax: @PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable[ ] Response Syntax: @PJL INQUIRE [command modifier:value] variable value [command modifier:value] The [command modifier:value] parameter specifies the type of PJL variables to be queried. The variables supported are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. • A [command modifier:value] parameter is not required for variables listed in the tables “Common Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-12, and “Printer Unique Variables for Both Printer Languages” on page 3-19. • LPARM:PCL is used with variables specific to PCL emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-48, and “Printer Unique Variables for PCL Emulation” on page 3-49.) • LPARM:POSTSCRIPT is used for variables specific for PostScript emulation. (See the tables “Common Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-51, and “Printer Unique Variables for PostScript Emulation” on page 3-52.) • LRESOURCE:"device:filename.filetype" is required for LRESOURCE vari- ables. (See the table “Printer Unique LRESOURCE Variables” on page 3-53.) Values for "device:filename.filetype" are: device flash, flash1, disk, or disk1 (case insensitive) filename A unique identifier for a file, such as the macro ID for a PCL macro, the symbol set ID for a PCL symbol set, the font ID for a PCL font, and so on. The filename is case sensitive. filetype An identifier that categorizes the file, such as p5macro for PCL macros or p5symset for PCL symbol sets. See the table beginning on page 3-87 for a complete list of the supported file types. The filetype is case sensitive. 3-59 PJL variable=value The supported variables are listed in the tables beginning on page 3-12. This printer returns a ? for inquiries of an unsupported variable, or inquiries of a variable associated with an option that is not installed. USTATUS Command This command is used to enable and disable unsolicited status from the printer. Unsolicited status information is sent automatically when an asynchronous event occurs. “Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values” on page 3-60 lists the asynchronous information that can be enabled and disabled. Syntax: @PJL USTATUS ustatus variable=value[ ] Response Syntax: @PJL USTATUS ustatus variable [one or more lines of printable characters, spaces, or tabs] To determine which variables your printer supports, see “Table B-9: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variables” on page B-13. See “Status Message Format” on page 3-61 for additional information about the messages returned by the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands. 3-60 PJL ustatus variable=value The following values are supported for the ustatus variable=value parameter. Table 3-11: USTATUS Unsolicited Status Variable Values Ustatus Variable Value Description DEVICE ON Enables unsolicited status for device changes. VERBOSE Enables unsolicited status for all device changes. Also enables warnings from the PJL parser. OFF Disables unsolicited status for device changes. ON Enables unsolicited status for job changes. The printer sends a status message when a job begins and ends. OFF Disables unsolicited status for job changes. ON Enables unsolicited status for page changes. The printer sends a status message when a printed sheet reaches the standard output bin. OFF Disables unsolicited status for page changes. 5 to 300 in seconds Enables timed unsolicited status. The printer automatically sends status at a specified time interval. 0 Disables timed unsolicited status. JOB PAGE TIMED USTATUSOFF Command This command turns off unsolicited status. Unsolicited status may also be turned off by using the USTATUS command on each variable. Syntax: @PJL USTATUSOFF[ ] 3-61 PJL Status Message Format The format of the returned information from the INFO STATUS, USTATUS DEVICE, and USTATUS TIMED commands is described in this section. Information Messages Information messages are returned in this form: CODE=status code DISPLAY=display string (in double quotes) ONLINE=online status Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Ready 10001 Ready TRUE Ready 10001 RDYMSG TRUE Ready with Ink Low 10006 88 Ink Low TRUE Not Ready 10002 Not Ready FALSE In the Menus 10002 Not Ready FALSE Printer reset 10005 Resetting the Printer FALSE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Yellow Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Magenta Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Cyan Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Black Toner Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Color Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Black Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Toner Low 10006 88 Photo Print Cartridge Low TRUE Ready with Replace Toner 10006 Replace Toner TRUE Ready with Replace PC Kit 10006 Replace PC Kit TRUE Ready with Replace Fuser 10006 Replace Fuser TRUE x represents an input source code. For more information on input source codes, see “Table 3-16: Tray Codes” on page 3-74. yy represents a size code. For more information on size codes, see “Table 3-17: Media Size Codes” on page 3-74. ww represents the bin code. For more information on bin codes, see “Table 3-18: Output Bin Codes” on page 3-75. Note: The Display String is returned in the current language. A display message longer than one line shows only the first line of the message. 3-62 PJL Table 3-12: PJL Information Messages Printer State Status Code Display String Online Status Ready with Replace Transfer 10006 Replace Transfer TRUE Power Saver with Ink Low 10006 88 Ink Low TRUE Power Saver mode with Toner Low 10006 88 Toner Low TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Toner 10006 Replace Toner TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace PC Kit 10006 Replace PC Kit TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Fuser 10006 Replace Fuser TRUE Power Saver mode with Replace Transfer 10006 Replace Transfer TRUE Cancelling Job 10007 Cancelling Job TRUE Busy 10023 Busy TRUE Waiting 10024 Waiting TRUE Input Source Empty 11xyy Tray